Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Optimization

1,663 missions · 888 completed

Missions

Open775Completed888All1663
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Consumer Returns Policies and Supply Chain Performance 1: With Valuations Learned after Purchase, the Seller's Optimal Policy Is p* = E max(V, s), F̄(q*) = (c − s)/(p* − s), r* = sResearch Paper

Motivation

Retailers accept large volumes of returned merchandise, and a common default is the full refund: a buyer who is unhappy with a product brings it back and gets the whole price back. Many consumers only learn how much they value a product after they have it at home — clothes that do not fit, a gadget that does not suit the buyer's needs. A returns policy therefore plays two roles at once. It raises the buyer's willingness to pay before purchase, and after purchase it decides which units stay with consumers and which go back to the seller to be salvaged.

Xuanming Su's paper Consumer Returns Policies and Supply Chain Performance (SSRN 1020451; published in Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 11(4), 2009, doi:10.1287/msom.1080.0240) puts this effect into a newsvendor model with random demand. The earlier literature it builds on, notably Che (1996) and Davis, Gerstner and Hagerty (1995), asked whether a seller should offer full refunds or no returns at all. Su's model makes the refund amount a separate decision variable. The answer it gives is closed-form and sharp: the optimal refund equals the salvage value. This mission formalizes Sections 3–4 of the paper: the single-seller model, the full-refund benchmark, and the optimal partial refund.

Setting

A seller stocks a quantity q≥0q \ge 0q≥0 before a selling season at unit cost ccc. Unsold and returned units are salvaged at value sss. Market demand is a nonnegative random variable XXX with law DDD, distribution function FFF and Fˉ=1−F\bar F = 1 - FFˉ=1−F. Each consumer who buys learns a valuation VVV after purchase. Valuations are i.i.d. with law ν\nuν and finite mean μ=EV\mu = EVμ=EV, and the standing assumption is μ>c>s≥0\mu > c > s \ge 0μ>c>s≥0.

The seller chooses a price ppp, a quantity qqq and a refund rrr. Once a consumer has bought, they keep the product if V≥rV \ge rV≥r and return it otherwise. The keep and return probabilities are

Gˉ(r)=P(V≥r),G(r)=P(V<r).\bar G(r) = \mathbb P(V \ge r), \qquad G(r) = \mathbb P(V < r).Gˉ(r)=P(V≥r),G(r)=P(V<r).

Before purchase a consumer's expected utility from buying is Emax⁡(V,r)E\max(V, r)Emax(V,r), so this is the reservation price. Every consumer buys if p≤Emax⁡(V,r)p \le E\max(V, r)p≤Emax(V,r) and nobody buys otherwise (the demand rule (6)). With Emin⁡(X,q)E\min(X, q)Emin(X,q) the expected sales of a stock qqq, the seller's expected profit (7)–(8) is

Π(p,q,r)=[(p−s)Gˉ(r)+(p−r)G(r)] Emin⁡(X,q)−(c−s)qif p≤Emax⁡(V,r),\Pi(p,q,r) = \big[(p-s)\bar G(r) + (p-r)G(r)\big]\,E\min(X,q) - (c-s)q \quad\text{if } p \le E\max(V,r),Π(p,q,r)=[(p−s)Gˉ(r)+(p−r)G(r)]Emin(X,q)−(c−s)qif p≤Emax(V,r),

and −(c−s)q-(c-s)q−(c−s)q otherwise. Two special cases serve as benchmarks. Under full refunds (r=pr = pr=p) every consumer buys and the profit is Πfull(p,q)=(p−s)Gˉ(p)Emin⁡(X,q)−(c−s)q\Pi_{\text{full}}(p,q) = (p-s)\bar G(p)E\min(X,q) - (c-s)qΠfull​(p,q)=(p−s)Gˉ(p)Emin(X,q)−(c−s)q, from (1)–(2). Under no returns the price is μ\muμ and the profit is Πno(q)=(μ−s)Emin⁡(X,q)−(c−s)q\Pi_{\text{no}}(q) = (\mu - s)E\min(X,q) - (c-s)qΠno​(q)=(μ−s)Emin(X,q)−(c−s)q, from (3). Social welfare (12)–(13) is the sum of consumer surplus and seller profit, SW(p,q,r)=∫[r,∞)(v−s) dν(v)⋅Emin⁡(X,q)−(c−s)qSW(p,q,r) = \int_{[r,\infty)}(v-s)\,d\nu(v)\cdot E\min(X,q) - (c-s)qSW(p,q,r)=∫[r,∞)​(v−s)dν(v)⋅Emin(X,q)−(c−s)q, again subject to the demand rule.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2 (p. 11)

With p∗=Emax⁡(V,s)p^* = E\max(V,s)p∗=Emax(V,s), r∗=sr^* = sr∗=s and any q∗q^*q∗ satisfying

Fˉ(q∗)=c−sEmax⁡(V,s)−s,\bar F(q^*) = \frac{c-s}{E\max(V,s) - s},Fˉ(q∗)=Emax(V,s)−sc−s​,

the triple (p∗,q∗,r∗)(p^*, q^*, r^*)(p∗,q∗,r∗) maximizes Π\PiΠ over all prices, all refunds and all quantities q≥0q \ge 0q≥0:

Π(p,q,r)≤Π(p∗,q∗,r∗).\Pi(p,q,r) \le \Pi(p^*, q^*, r^*).Π(p,q,r)≤Π(p∗,q∗,r∗).

Milestones

  1. The reservation price splits as Emax⁡(V,r)=rG(r)+∫[r,∞)v dνE\max(V,r) = rG(r) + \int_{[r,\infty)} v\,d\nuEmax(V,r)=rG(r)+∫[r,∞)​vdν, which is the step (28)→(29) of the proof (p. 26).
  2. At p=Emax⁡(V,r)p = E\max(V,r)p=Emax(V,r) the per-unit margin (p−s)Gˉ(r)+(p−r)G(r)(p-s)\bar G(r) + (p-r)G(r)(p−s)Gˉ(r)+(p−r)G(r) equals ∫[r,∞)(v−s) dν\int_{[r,\infty)}(v-s)\,d\nu∫[r,∞)​(v−s)dν, displays (27)–(30), p. 26.
  3. This integral is maximized at r=sr = sr=s (p. 26).
  4. Hence (Emax⁡(V,s),s)(E\max(V,s), s)(Emax(V,s),s) maximizes the margin subject to p≤Emax⁡(V,r)p \le E\max(V,r)p≤Emax(V,r), the first step of the proof (p. 26).
  5. The newsvendor critical fractile, a reference to a proved platform theorem (p. 26).
  6. Proposition 1(i) (p. 9): under full refunds, p∗∈arg⁡max⁡p(p−s)Gˉ(p)p^* \in \arg\max_p (p-s)\bar G(p)p∗∈argmaxp​(p−s)Gˉ(p) with Fˉ(q∗)=(c−s)/((p∗−s)Gˉ(p∗))\bar F(q^*) = (c-s)/((p^*-s)\bar G(p^*))Fˉ(q∗)=(c−s)/((p∗−s)Gˉ(p∗)) is optimal.
  7. Proposition 1(ii) at s=0s = 0s=0 (p. 26): with nonnegative valuations, no returns beats every full-refund policy.
  8. Corollary 1 (p. 12): the inequality (p−s)Gˉ(p)≤Emax⁡(V,s)−s(p-s)\bar G(p) \le E\max(V,s) - s(p−s)Gˉ(p)≤Emax(V,s)−s (p. 26), and its consequence that partial refunds earn at least the full-refund profit and, for strictly increasing FFF, stock at least as much.
  9. Corollary 2 (p. 13): the triple of Proposition 2 also maximizes social welfare.

Significance

The result separates two things that a full refund ties together: the price and the refund. Setting r=sr = sr=s sends every unit back to its more valuable use. Consumers who value the product above its salvage value keep it, and the rest return it to be salvaged. The price Emax⁡(V,s)E\max(V,s)Emax(V,s) then extracts the whole expected surplus. Consequences follow directly. Partial refunds dominate both full refunds and no returns (Corollary 1). They raise the stocking quantity, which benefits an upstream manufacturer paid per unit ordered. With valuation uncertainty resolved only after purchase, the monopoly outcome is welfare-maximizing (Corollary 2). Section 5 of the paper, formalized in the companion mission, uses Proposition 2's triple as the first-best target that supply chain contracts must implement.

The results are proved on paper with short arguments in Appendix A of the paper. None of them has a machine-checked proof. The mission's contribution is a formal model of consumer returns with the demand rule built in, plus checked versions of Propositions 1–2 and Corollaries 1–2 for general valuation laws (with atoms), not only densities.

Difficulty

The paper's proof treats the problem as separable: first maximize the margin over (p,r)(p, r)(p,r), then solve a newsvendor problem in qqq. Two steps that are routine on paper need care. First, the margin bound must hold over the whole constrained region p≤Emax⁡(V,r)p \le E\max(V, r)p≤Emax(V,r), including refunds above the price and negative prices. It rests on comparing ∫[r,∞)(v−s) dν\int_{[r,\infty)}(v-s)\,d\nu∫[r,∞)​(v−s)dν with ∫[s,∞)(v−s) dν\int_{[s,\infty)}(v-s)\,d\nu∫[s,∞)​(v−s)dν, which needs the closed half-line convention to hold up at atoms of ν\nuν. Second, the newsvendor step must be done for a demand law that may have atoms, where Fˉ\bar FFˉ has no inverse. Without the demand rule the problem is not separable at all: formula (8) alone is unbounded in ppp. Without nonnegativity of demand and quantity it is unbounded in the other direction.

Formalization scope

Lean represents all prices, refunds, costs, quantities and profits as real numbers. The valuation law is a probability measure ν on ℝ with integrable identity, so a density is not required. The demand law is a probability measure D on ℝ with D (Set.Iio 0) = 0. Gˉ(r)\bar G(r)Gˉ(r) is (ν (Set.Ici r)).toReal and G(r)G(r)G(r) is (ν (Set.Iio r)).toReal, following the page's tie rule (keep iff V≥rV \ge rV≥r). Emin⁡(X,q)E\min(X,q)Emin(X,q) is SupplyChainTheory.expSales D q from the published module SupplyChainTheory_contracts, and Fˉ\bar FFˉ is 1 - ProbabilityTheory.cdf D. Printed page numbers equal PDF page numbers throughout the source.

Committed conventions and readings:

  • Demand rule inside the objectives. Profit and welfare are zero-demand cash flows when p>Emax⁡(V,r)p > E\max(V,r)p>Emax(V,r).
  • Nonnegativity. Stocking quantities range over q≥0q \ge 0q≥0 and demand is nonnegative. Both are the page's words ("stocking quantity", "a mass of infinitesimal consumers"), and without them the profit is unbounded.
  • Salvage value. 0≤s0 \le s0≤s, as on p. 26.
  • Optimality, not uniqueness. Every optimum is stated as optimality of the page's closed-form triple. Uniqueness fails when ν\nuν has gaps: if ν\nuν puts no mass on [s,r)[s, r)[s,r), the refund rrr is optimal too.
  • No continuity of FFF for the goal. The goal assumes no continuity of FFF. Existence of q∗q^*q∗ is not claimed.
  • Corollary 1, quantity part. The quantity comparison assumes FFF strictly increasing on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), which the proof's Fˉ−1\bar F^{-1}Fˉ−1 presumes. Without it the statement is false.
  • Proposition 1(ii) at s=0s = 0s=0. This case assumes nonnegative valuations. The "sufficiently low" form of Proposition 1(ii) is not formalized.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: p∗p^*p∗ and r∗r^*r∗ are the explicit values Emax⁡(V,s)E\max(V,s)Emax(V,s) and sss, not an argmax chosen by Classical.choose. The maximization ranges over all (p,r)(p, r)(p,r) and all q≥0q \ge 0q≥0, not a set restricted to r=sr = sr=s. The returned-units cash flow (p−r+s)G(r)(p - r + s)G(r)(p−r+s)G(r) appears in the profit.

The newsvendor step reuses the proved platform theorem SupplyChainTheory.chain_optimal_fractile. The other pieces needed are elementary lemmas on integrals over half-lines and the concavity of q↦Emin⁡(X,q)q \mapsto E\min(X,q)q↦Emin(X,q). They are reusable for any newsvendor-type model. Proofs of any milestone, and a general-law newsvendor optimality lemma that does not need a continuous FFF, are welcome.

Selected references

  • X. Su, Consumer Returns Policies and Supply Chain Performance, SSRN working paper 1020451, version of August 2008. https://ssrn.com/abstract=1020451 — published in Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 11(4), 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.1080.0240
  • Y.-K. Che, Customer Return Policies for Experience Goods, Journal of Industrial Economics 44(1), 1996. https://doi.org/10.2307/2950560
  • S. Davis, E. Gerstner, M. Hagerty, Money Back Guarantees in Retailing: Matching Products to Consumer Tastes, Journal of Retailing 71(1), 1995. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-4359(95)90010-1
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Monotone Comparative Statics III: f(x, t) + p·x Is Quasisupermodular with the Single Crossing Property for Every Price Vector p If and Only If f Is SupermodularResearch Paper

Motivation

Monotone comparative statics asks when the optimal choice of an agent moves in a predictable direction as a parameter of the problem changes: does a firm hire more of every input when the output price rises, does a monopolist raise its price when its marginal cost rises? Topkis (1978) gave a cardinal answer: if the objective f(x,t)f(x,t)f(x,t) is supermodular in the choice xxx and has increasing differences in (x,t)(x,t)(x,t), the set of maximizers is nondecreasing in ttt. Milgrom and Shannon (1994) replaced these conditions by ordinal ones, quasisupermodularity and the single crossing property, and showed in their Monotonicity Theorem that the ordinal conditions are both necessary and sufficient for the argmax to be monotone in the parameter and the constraint set.

Supermodularity is therefore never necessary for monotone comparative statics. Theorem 10 of Milgrom and Shannon identifies a setting where it is: when the objective must keep the ordinal properties after adding an arbitrary linear price term p⋅xp\cdot xp⋅x (or subtracting an arbitrary nonnegative cost w⋅xw\cdot xw⋅x), the only objectives that qualify are the supermodular ones. This is the situation of a price-taking firm whose revenue or cost is linear in its activity levels, and the result explains why supermodularity is the natural assumption in such models even though the ordinal theory does not require it.

Setting

Let XXX be a lattice: a partially ordered set in which every two elements x,yx, yx,y have a least upper bound x∨yx \vee yx∨y (join) and a greatest lower bound x∧yx \wedge yx∧y (meet). On Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn the order is componentwise, so x∨yx \vee yx∨y and x∧yx \wedge yx∧y are the componentwise maximum and minimum; on a product Rn×R\mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}Rn×R the order is the product order. For p,x∈Rnp, x \in \mathbb{R}^np,x∈Rn, p⋅x=∑ipixip \cdot x = \sum_i p_i x_ip⋅x=∑i​pi​xi​.

A function g:X→Rg : X \to \mathbb{R}g:X→R is supermodular if g(x)+g(y)≤g(x∨y)+g(x∧y)g(x) + g(y) \le g(x \vee y) + g(x \wedge y)g(x)+g(y)≤g(x∨y)+g(x∧y) for all x,y∈Xx, y \in Xx,y∈X. It is quasisupermodular if, for all x,y∈Xx, y \in Xx,y∈X, (i) g(x)≥g(x∧y)g(x) \ge g(x \wedge y)g(x)≥g(x∧y) implies g(x∨y)≥g(y)g(x \vee y) \ge g(y)g(x∨y)≥g(y), and (ii) g(x)>g(x∧y)g(x) > g(x \wedge y)g(x)>g(x∧y) implies g(x∨y)>g(y)g(x \vee y) > g(y)g(x∨y)>g(y).

Let TTT be a partially ordered set and f:X×T→Rf : X \times T \to \mathbb{R}f:X×T→R. The function fff has increasing differences in (x,t)(x, t)(x,t) if for x′≥x′′x' \ge x''x′≥x′′ the difference f(x′,t)−f(x′′,t)f(x', t) - f(x'', t)f(x′,t)−f(x′′,t) is nondecreasing in ttt. It has the single crossing property in (x;t)(x; t)(x;t) if for all x′>x′′x' > x''x′>x′′ and t′>t′′t' > t''t′>t′′, f(x′,t′′)>f(x′′,t′′)f(x', t'') > f(x'', t'')f(x′,t′′)>f(x′′,t′′) implies f(x′,t′)>f(x′′,t′)f(x', t') > f(x'', t')f(x′,t′)>f(x′′,t′), and f(x′,t′′)≥f(x′′,t′′)f(x', t'') \ge f(x'', t'')f(x′,t′′)≥f(x′′,t′′) implies f(x′,t′)≥f(x′′,t′)f(x', t') \ge f(x'', t')f(x′,t′)≥f(x′′,t′). The function fff is quasisupermodular in xxx if f(⋅,t)f(\cdot, t)f(⋅,t) is quasisupermodular for every ttt, and nondecreasing in xxx if f(⋅,t)f(\cdot, t)f(⋅,t) is nondecreasing for every ttt.

In the Lean development the domain Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is Fin n → ℝ, fff is curried as f : (Fin n → ℝ) → ℝ → ℝ, p⋅xp \cdot xp⋅x is p ⬝ᵥ x, and supermodularity and increasing differences are the published Supermodularity.Monotonicity.SupermodularOn and IncreasingDifferencesOn with the domain Set.univ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 10 (p. 166)

Let f:Rn×R→Rf : \mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}f:Rn×R→R. Then

(∀p∈Rn: f(x,t)+p⋅x is quasisupermodular in x and single crossing in (x;t))  ⟺  f is supermodular,\Big(\forall p \in \mathbb{R}^n:\ f(x,t) + p\cdot x \text{ is quasisupermodular in } x \text{ and single crossing in } (x;t)\Big) \iff f \text{ is supermodular},(∀p∈Rn: f(x,t)+p⋅x is quasisupermodular in x and single crossing in (x;t))⟺f is supermodular,

and, if fff is nondecreasing in xxx,

(∀w∈Rn, w≥0: f(x,t)−w⋅x is quasisupermodular in x and single crossing in (x;t))  ⟺  f is supermodular.\Big(\forall w \in \mathbb{R}^n,\ w \ge 0:\ f(x,t) - w\cdot x \text{ is quasisupermodular in } x \text{ and single crossing in } (x;t)\Big) \iff f \text{ is supermodular}.(∀w∈Rn, w≥0: f(x,t)−w⋅x is quasisupermodular in x and single crossing in (x;t))⟺f is supermodular.

Here "fff is supermodular" means supermodular on the lattice Rn×R\mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}Rn×R, jointly in (x,t)(x,t)(x,t).

Milestones

  1. Every supermodular function on a lattice is quasisupermodular (p. 164, remark after Theorem 5).
  2. Every function with increasing differences in (x,t)(x, t)(x,t) has the single crossing property in (x;t)(x; t)(x;t) (same remark).
  3. If g+p⋅xg + p\cdot xg+p⋅x is quasisupermodular on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn for every p∈Rnp \in \mathbb{R}^np∈Rn, then ggg is supermodular (the converse step of the proof of Theorem 10).
  4. The first sentence of Theorem 10 on its own.

Significance

The result. The Monotonicity Theorem shows that the ordinal conditions are exactly what monotone comparative statics needs for a single objective. Theorem 10 shows that the cardinal conditions are exactly what is needed for a family of objectives closed under linear prices. It separates two questions that are often conflated: whether a particular optimization problem has monotone solutions (ordinal), and whether a model's monotonicity conclusion is robust to the prices or costs the modeller adds to it (cardinal). The second sentence specializes to the economically common case of nonnegative input costs, where the restriction to w≥0w \ge 0w≥0 is offset by the monotonicity of fff.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper, with the converse direction given in detail only for the step "supermodular in xxx" and the remaining cases left as "similar arguments". The mission produces machine-checked proofs of both equivalences, including the cases the paper does not write out: the recovery of increasing differences from the single crossing property under all price perturbations, and the recovery under the sign restriction w≥0w \ge 0w≥0. No part of Milgrom and Shannon's paper was found formalized on the platform when this mission was drafted; Topkis's supermodularity theory is partly available on the platform as the Supermodularity.* series.

Difficulty

The forward direction is a chain of short implications. The content is in the converse: from purely ordinal information about many functions one must recover a cardinal inequality. The single crossing property and quasisupermodularity only compare values of one function at two points, so a single perturbation can never yield an inequality between sums of four values; the argument must choose, for each violating configuration, a price vector that makes two of the four values tie, and the choice must be compatible with the sign constraint w≥0w \ge 0w≥0 in the second statement. That compatibility is where the hypothesis that fff is nondecreasing in xxx enters, and without it the second equivalence fails. A second subtlety is the decomposition of joint supermodularity on Rn×R\mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}Rn×R into supermodularity in xxx and increasing differences in (x,t)(x,t)(x,t), which the paper uses without statement; the platform does not yet have it.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is Fin n → ℝ with Mathlib's pointwise order and lattice operations; n≥0n \ge 0n≥0 is arbitrary. The product Rn×R\mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}Rn×R carries Mathlib's product order.
  • f:Rn×R→Rf : \mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}f:Rn×R→R is curried. "fff is supermodular" is read as joint supermodularity on Rn×R\mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}Rn×R, as the paper's proof confirms ("If fff is supermodular in (x,t)(x, t)(x,t) …"); with supermodularity in xxx only, the "if" direction would be false.
  • Quasisupermodularity and the single crossing property are the paper's definitions verbatim: strict comparisons x′>x′′x' > x''x′>x′′, t′>t′′t' > t''t′>t′′ in the single crossing property, both the weak and the strict implication in both notions, and quantification over all ordered pairs. The paper's single crossing property is stated for a lattice XXX; the Lean definition only uses the order.
  • The quantifier over ppp (and over w≥0w \ge 0w≥0) is universal and covers both properties at once. The second equivalence keeps −w⋅x- w\cdot x−w⋅x with w≥0w \ge 0w≥0 componentwise and has "nondecreasing in xxx" as its hypothesis only.
  • Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: an existential quantifier over ppp, supermodularity in xxx only on the right-hand side, merging the two sentences with p=−wp = -wp=−w, or dropping the monotonicity hypothesis would each state a different, false or weaker theorem.
  • The definitions QuasiSupermodularOn and SingleCrossing are shared with the two sibling missions on Milgrom and Shannon's Theorems 4 and 8 and will be merged with them. A lemma decomposing supermodularity on a product lattice into supermodularity in each factor and increasing differences would be reusable well beyond this mission; contributions of such general lattice lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • P. Milgrom and C. Shannon, Monotone Comparative Statics, Econometrica 62(1), 157–180, 1994. https://doi.org/10.2307/2951479
  • D. M. Topkis, Minimizing a Submodular Function on a Lattice, Operations Research 26(2), 305–321, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.26.2.305
  • D. M. Topkis, Supermodularity and Complementarity, Princeton University Press, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400822539
9 thms4 active usersReviewed
Complexity TheoryLinear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

On Adaptive-Step Primal-Dual Interior-Point Algorithms for Linear Programming 3: The Potential-Reduction Algorithm in N∞⁻(β) with ρ − n of Order n² Attains Precision t in O(nt) IterationsResearch Paper

Motivation

Primal–dual interior-point methods solve a linear program by following, approximately, the central path of strictly feasible primal–dual pairs. Two families dominate the theory. Path-following methods keep the iterates in a neighbourhood of the path and measure progress by the duality gap. Potential-reduction methods measure progress by a merit function, the primal–dual potential of Todd and Ye (Todd–Ye 1990), and choose the step to decrease it.

The potential carries a parameter ρ>n\rho > nρ>n. The classical analyses (Ye 1991, Freund, Anstreicher–Bosch, Kojima–Mizuno–Yoshise) give O(n t)O(\sqrt n\,t)O(n​t) iterations with ρ=n+Θ(n)\rho = n + \Theta(\sqrt n)ρ=n+Θ(n​). Practical codes, however, performed better with much larger ρ\rhoρ (McShane–Monma–Shanno, Lustig–Marsten–Shanno). Mizuno, Todd and Ye (Cornell ORIE Technical Report No. 944, 1990, rev. 1991; journal version Math. Oper. Res. 18(4), 1993, doi:10.1287/moor.18.4.964) supply a worst-case justification for a large parameter. With ρ=n+Θ(n2)\rho = n + \Theta(n^2)ρ=n+Θ(n2) and the step chosen to minimise the potential inside the wide neighbourhood N∞−(β)\mathcal N_\infty^-(\beta)N∞−​(β), the method needs O(nt)O(nt)O(nt) iterations. That matches the adaptive-step path-following method in the same neighbourhood (their Theorem 2).

Timeline:

  • 1990: Todd and Ye introduce the primal–dual potential function.
  • 1989–1991: Kojima–Mizuno–Yoshise, Ye, Freund and others prove O(n t)O(\sqrt n\,t)O(n​t) bounds for ρ=n+Θ(n)\rho = n + \Theta(\sqrt n)ρ=n+Θ(n​).
  • 1990–1991: Mizuno, Todd and Ye prove the O(nt)O(nt)O(nt) bound for ρ=n+Θ(n2)\rho = n + \Theta(n^2)ρ=n+Θ(n2) (Theorem 3 of the report formalized here).

Setting

Fix m≥0m \ge 0m≥0, n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, A∈Rm×nA \in \mathbb R^{m\times n}A∈Rm×n, b∈Rmb \in \mathbb R^mb∈Rm, c∈Rnc \in \mathbb R^nc∈Rn. The primal problem is min⁡cTx\min c^TxmincTx subject to Ax=bAx = bAx=b, x≥0x \ge 0x≥0. The dual is max⁡bTy\max b^TymaxbTy subject to ATy+s=cA^Ty + s = cATy+s=c, s≥0s \ge 0s≥0. The strictly feasible set F0\mathcal F^0F0 is the set of pairs (x,s)(x, s)(x,s) with x>0x > 0x>0, s>0s > 0s>0, Ax=bAx = bAx=b and ATy+s=cA^Ty + s = cATy+s=c for some yyy. The duality measure is μ=xTs/n\mu = x^Ts/nμ=xTs/n.

For z∈Rnz \in \mathbb R^nz∈Rn put (z−)j=min⁡{zj,0}(z^-)_j = \min\{z_j, 0\}(z−)j​=min{zj​,0} and ∥z∥∞−=∥z−∥∞\|z\|_\infty^- = \|z^-\|_\infty∥z∥∞−​=∥z−∥∞​. For β∈(0,1)\beta \in (0,1)β∈(0,1), the wide neighbourhood is

N∞−(β)={(x,s)∈F0:∥Xs−μe∥∞−≤βμ},\mathcal N_\infty^-(\beta) = \{(x,s) \in \mathcal F^0 : \|Xs - \mu e\|_\infty^- \le \beta\mu\},N∞−​(β)={(x,s)∈F0:∥Xs−μe∥∞−​≤βμ},

i.e. xjsj≥(1−β)μx_js_j \ge (1-\beta)\muxj​sj​≥(1−β)μ for all jjj, where X=diag(x)X = \mathrm{diag}(x)X=diag(x) and eee is the all-ones vector.

The potential is

ψ(x,s)=ρlog⁡(xTs)−∑j=1nlog⁡(xjsj),ρ>n,\psi(x,s) = \rho\log(x^Ts) - \sum_{j=1}^n \log(x_js_j), \qquad \rho > n,ψ(x,s)=ρlog(xTs)−j=1∑n​log(xj​sj​),ρ>n,

with the natural logarithm. At (x,s)(x,s)(x,s) and for γ∈(0,1)\gamma \in (0,1)γ∈(0,1), a search direction d=(dx,dy,ds)d = (d_x, d_y, d_s)d=(dx​,dy​,ds​) solves

Sdx+Xds=γμe−Xs,Adx=0,ATdy+ds=0,S d_x + X d_s = \gamma\mu e - Xs,\qquad A d_x = 0,\qquad A^Td_y + d_s = 0,Sdx​+Xds​=γμe−Xs,Adx​=0,ATdy​+ds​=0,

and the iterates move along x(θ)=x+θdxx(\theta) = x + \theta d_xx(θ)=x+θdx​, s(θ)=s+θdss(\theta) = s + \theta d_ss(θ)=s+θds​. The scaled vectors are pj=sj/xj (dx)jp_j = \sqrt{s_j/x_j}\,(d_x)_jpj​=sj​/xj​​(dx​)j​ and qj=xj/sj (ds)jq_j = \sqrt{x_j/s_j}\,(d_s)_jqj​=xj​/sj​​(ds​)j​, Pq=(pjqj)jPq = (p_jq_j)_jPq=(pj​qj​)j​, and θ2−=min⁡{1,βγμ/∥Pq∥∞−}\theta_2^- = \min\{1, \beta\gamma\mu/\|Pq\|_\infty^-\}θ2−​=min{1,βγμ/∥Pq∥∞−​}.

Algorithm 3. Start from (x0,s0)∈N∞−(β)(x^0,s^0) \in \mathcal N_\infty^-(\beta)(x0,s0)∈N∞−​(β) with (x0)Ts0≤2t(x^0)^Ts^0 \le 2^t(x0)Ts0≤2t and ψ(x0,s0)≤(ρ−n)t+nlog⁡n\psi(x^0,s^0) \le (\rho-n)t + n\log nψ(x0,s0)≤(ρ−n)t+nlogn. While (xk)Tsk>2−t(x^k)^Ts^k > 2^{-t}(xk)Tsk>2−t, compute ddd at (xk,sk)(x^k, s^k)(xk,sk), choose θˉ\bar\thetaθˉ with (x(θˉ),s(θˉ))∈N∞−(β)(x(\bar\theta), s(\bar\theta)) \in \mathcal N_\infty^-(\beta)(x(θˉ),s(θˉ))∈N∞−​(β) and ψ(x(θˉ),s(θˉ))≤ψ(x(θ),s(θ))\psi(x(\bar\theta), s(\bar\theta)) \le \psi(x(\theta), s(\theta))ψ(x(θˉ),s(θˉ))≤ψ(x(θ),s(θ)) for every θ\thetaθ with (x(θ),s(θ))∈N∞−(β)(x(\theta), s(\theta)) \in \mathcal N_\infty^-(\beta)(x(θ),s(θ))∈N∞−​(β), and move to (x(θˉ),s(θˉ))(x(\bar\theta), s(\bar\theta))(x(θˉ),s(θˉ)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (p. 11)

Let β,γ∈(0,1)\beta,\gamma \in (0,1)β,γ∈(0,1) with γ≤2(1−β)\gamma \le 2(1-\beta)γ≤2(1−β) and

ρ=n+(3βγ(1−γ)log⁡11−β)n2.\rho = n + \Bigl(\frac{3}{\beta\gamma(1-\gamma)}\log\frac{1}{1-\beta}\Bigr)n^2.ρ=n+(βγ(1−γ)3​log1−β1​)n2.

For every t>0t > 0t>0 and every run of Algorithm 3,

∃ k≤⌈6nt11βγ(1−γ)⌉:(xk)Tsk≤2−t.\exists\, k \le \Bigl\lceil \frac{6nt}{11\beta\gamma(1-\gamma)} \Bigr\rceil:\quad (x^k)^Ts^k \le 2^{-t}.∃k≤⌈11βγ(1−γ)6nt​⌉:(xk)Tsk≤2−t.

The paper states "O(nt)O(nt)O(nt) iterations". The explicit count is the one its own proof yields, and it is stated so that the goal is not an existential over a constant.

Milestones

  1. §5, p. 11. ψ(x,s)=(ρ−n)log⁡(xTs)−∑jlog⁡xjsjxTs/n+nlog⁡n≥(ρ−n)log⁡(xTs)+nlog⁡n\psi(x,s) = (\rho-n)\log(x^Ts) - \sum_j\log\frac{x_js_j}{x^Ts/n} + n\log n \ge (\rho-n)\log(x^Ts) + n\log nψ(x,s)=(ρ−n)log(xTs)−∑j​logxTs/nxj​sj​​+nlogn≥(ρ−n)log(xTs)+nlogn. Hence reducing ψ\psiψ to −(ρ−n)t+nlog⁡n-(\rho-n)t + n\log n−(ρ−n)t+nlogn gives xTs≤2−tx^Ts \le 2^{-t}xTs≤2−t.
  2. (16), p. 12. One step of Algorithm 3 satisfies ψ(x(θˉ),s(θˉ))−ψ(x,s)≤−(3n2θ2−βγ−n)log⁡11−β\psi(x(\bar\theta),s(\bar\theta)) - \psi(x,s) \le -\bigl(\frac{3n^2\theta_2^-}{\beta\gamma} - n\bigr)\log\frac{1}{1-\beta}ψ(x(θˉ),s(θˉ))−ψ(x,s)≤−(βγ3n2θ2−​​−n)log1−β1​.
  3. Proof of Theorem 3, p. 12. For n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, every step decreases ψ\psiψ by at least 11nlog⁡11−β11n\log\frac{1}{1-\beta}11nlog1−β1​.

Significance

The result shows that a potential-reduction method with ρ−n\rho - nρ−n of order n2n^2n2 keeps a polynomial worst-case bound. The earlier analyses cited by the report used ρ−n\rho - nρ−n of order n\sqrt nn​. It thereby gives a worst-case justification for the large parameters that worked in practice. It also connects the two families: the direction is the path-following direction, and only the step rule changes. Corollary 3 of the paper adds that iterations with a small second-order term PqPqPq decrease the potential far more.

The result is proved in the report. As far as the platform's index shows, no part of it has been machine-checked. The platform already holds the potential function (Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis §9.3) and a proved bookkeeping theorem converting a constant per-iteration decrease into an iteration count (Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis Theorem 9.4). This mission adds the analysis of a concrete algorithm: the admissibility of the step θ2−\theta_2^-θ2−​ in N∞−(β)\mathcal N_\infty^-(\beta)N∞−​(β), the potential decrease (16), and the complexity bound.

Difficulty

The step θˉ\bar\thetaθˉ is defined by minimisation, not by an explicit formula, so its decrease must be bounded by comparison with a step whose effect can be computed. That reference step must be shown to stay in the neighbourhood. This requires controlling the second-order term PqPqPq of the Newton direction in the one-sided norm ∥⋅∥∞−\|\cdot\|_\infty^-∥⋅∥∞−​, together with the centrality of the current iterate. A fixed decrease of order nnn arises only because ρ−n\rho - nρ−n is of order n2n^2n2. Below that scale, the duality-gap term of the potential no longer dominates the loss in centrality from a long step.

A second obstacle is specific to formal work. Algorithm 3's rule ranges over every real θ\thetaθ whose point lies in the neighbourhood, and a minimiser need not exist. The goal must hold for every run, including the degenerate ones.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin n → ℝ, with index j=1,…,nj = 1,\dots,nj=1,…,n mapped to Fin n; ∥⋅∥∞\|\cdot\|_\infty∥⋅∥∞​ is Mathlib's sup norm. The general standard-form LP pair is a separate definition, and the neighbourhood and algorithm build on its strict feasibility predicate. ψ\psiψ is the published definition LinearOptimization.interiorPointPotential with q:=ρq := \rhoq:=ρ. It equals (1) at every strictly positive pair, and it is evaluated only at points of N∞−(β)\mathcal N_\infty^-(\beta)N∞−​(β). All logarithms are natural, and 2±t2^{\pm t}2±t are real powers with real t>0t > 0t>0. A run is a pair of sequences satisfying the start conditions and, whenever the current gap exceeds 2−t2^{-t}2−t, the step relation of Algorithm 3. Iterates after termination are unconstrained.

Conventions and repairs:

  • θ2−:=1\theta_2^- := 1θ2−​:=1 when ∥Pq∥∞−=0\|Pq\|_\infty^- = 0∥Pq∥∞−​=0, reading βγμ/0\beta\gamma\mu/0βγμ/0 as +∞+\infty+∞.
  • The per-iteration milestone keeps the page's n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. The paper's step θ2−≥4βγ/n\theta_2^- \ge 4\beta\gamma/nθ2−​≥4βγ/n needs 4βγ≤n4\beta\gamma \le n4βγ≤n, which can fail for n=1n = 1n=1; but for n=1n = 1n=1 the potential is unbounded below along the line inside the neighbourhood, so no step exists and the statement holds vacuously there. The goal keeps n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 as well.
  • The minimisation in Algorithm 3 ranges over all real θ\thetaθ, as printed. It does not range over a segment, and the step is not the largest admissible step of Algorithm 2.
  • Both start conditions are kept: (x0)Ts0≤2t(x^0)^Ts^0 \le 2^t(x0)Ts0≤2t from Algorithm 2 and the potential bound of §5.

A formalization in which no run can exist for any instance, or in which ρ\rhoρ or the iteration count absorbs an instance-dependent constant, would trivialize the goal. The step relation above is satisfiable for n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 whenever the potential attains its minimum along the line, and the count is the explicit expression above.

Needed infrastructure: the algebra of system (2), namely dxTds=0d_x^Td_s = 0dxT​ds​=0, the identity μ(θ)=(1−(1−γ)θ)μ\mu(\theta) = (1-(1-\gamma)\theta)\muμ(θ)=(1−(1−γ)θ)μ, and X(θ)s(θ)−μ(θ)e=(1−θ)(Xs−μe)+θ2PqX(\theta)s(\theta) - \mu(\theta)e = (1-\theta)(Xs - \mu e) + \theta^2 PqX(θ)s(θ)−μ(θ)e=(1−θ)(Xs−μe)+θ2Pq. Also needed are the bounds ∥Pq∥∞≤∥r∥2/4\|Pq\|_\infty \le \|r\|^2/4∥Pq∥∞​≤∥r∥2/4 and ∥r∥2≤nμ\|r\|^2 \le n\mu∥r∥2≤nμ on N∞−(β)\mathcal N_\infty^-(\beta)N∞−​(β) when γ≤2(1−β)\gamma \le 2(1-\beta)γ≤2(1−β), and the arithmetic–geometric mean inequality for ψ\psiψ. These facts are shared with the sibling missions on the predictor–corrector and wide-neighbourhood algorithms of the same paper, and lemmas proved here are welcome there. The proved Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis theorem LinearOptimization.interior_point_potential_reduction is included as a reference item for the final counting step. Its hypotheses quantify over all iterations and need explicit dual iterates, so it does not apply verbatim.

Selected references

  • S. Mizuno, M. J. Todd, Y. Ye, On adaptive-step primal-dual interior-point algorithms for linear programming, Cornell ORIE Technical Report No. 944, 1990, rev. 1991; Mathematics of Operations Research 18(4):964–981, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.18.4.964
  • M. J. Todd, Y. Ye, A centered projective algorithm for linear programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 15(3):508–529, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.15.3.508
12 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Computational GeometryConvex Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Rounding of Polytopes in the Real Number Model of Computation: Barycentric Coordinate Descent Finds a (1+ε)n-Rounding Ellipsoid of m Points in O(n(1/ε + ln n + ln ln m)) IterationsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many algorithms for convex bodies need the body to be well rounded: sandwiched between two concentric ellipsoids whose size ratio is controlled by the dimension. The ellipsoid method, volume and integration algorithms, and preconditioning for linear programming use such roundings. For a polytope given by its vertices a1,…,am∈Rna_1,\dots,a_m \in \mathbb{R}^na1​,…,am​∈Rn, John's theorem guarantees an ellipsoid EEE with

n−1E⊆conv⁡{a1,…,am}⊆E,n^{-1}E \subseteq \operatorname{conv}\{a_1,\dots,a_m\} \subseteq E,n−1E⊆conv{a1​,…,am​}⊆E,

the minimum-volume circumscribed (Löwner–John) ellipsoid scaled about its centre; for centrally symmetric sets the factor improves to n\sqrt nn​. The associated D-optimal design problem is a convex optimization problem. Khachiyan (1996) uses this connection to obtain a finite approximation algorithm.

Khachiyan shows that barycentric coordinate descent (BCD) computes a (1+ε)n(1+\varepsilon)n(1+ε)n-rounding in O(mn2(ε−1+ln⁡n+ln⁡ln⁡m))O(mn^2(\varepsilon^{-1} + \ln n + \ln\ln m))O(mn2(ε−1+lnn+lnlnm)) arithmetic operations. For fixed dimension and tolerance, this is linear in the number of points; the iteration bound depends on that number only through ln⁡ln⁡m\ln\ln mlnlnm. Khachiyan (1996)

The paper builds on the Kiefer–Wolfowitz optimality conditions (1960). Later work revisits the method's complexity and variants; see Todd and Yıldırım (2007).

Setting

Let a1,…,am∈Rna_1,\dots,a_m \in \mathbb{R}^na1​,…,am​∈Rn and let SSS be the unit simplex of weights p≥0p \ge 0p≥0, ∑ipi=1\sum_i p_i = 1∑i​pi​=1. For p∈Sp \in Sp∈S write

A(p)=∑i=1mpi aiaiT,F(p)=ln⁡det⁡A(p),wj(p)=ajTA(p)−1aj,A(p) = \sum_{i=1}^m p_i\, a_i a_i^{\mathsf T}, \qquad F(p) = \ln\det A(p), \qquad w_j(p) = a_j^{\mathsf T}A(p)^{-1}a_j ,A(p)=i=1∑m​pi​ai​aiT​,F(p)=lndetA(p),wj​(p)=ajT​A(p)−1aj​,

and let SF={p∈S∣det⁡A(p)>0}S_F = \{p \in S \mid \det A(p) > 0\}SF​={p∈S∣detA(p)>0}. Maximizing FFF over SSS is the D-optimal design problem (2.3); F∗F^*F∗ is its optimal value. A point p∈SFp \in S_Fp∈SF​ satisfies the ε\varepsilonε-relaxed optimality conditions (2.10) if wj(p)≤(1+ε)nw_j(p) \le (1+\varepsilon)nwj​(p)≤(1+ε)n for every jjj; the accuracy ε(p)=max⁡jwj(p)/n−1\varepsilon(p) = \max_j w_j(p)/n - 1ε(p)=maxj​wj​(p)/n−1 is the least such ε\varepsilonε.

The BCD method starts at p0=(1/m,…,1/m)p_0 = (1/m,\dots,1/m)p0​=(1/m,…,1/m) and repeats

pk+1=(1−τ) pk+τ er,τ=ε(pk)wr(pk)−1,p_{k+1} = (1-\tau)\,p_k + \tau\, e_r, \qquad \tau = \frac{\varepsilon(p_k)}{w_r(p_k) - 1},pk+1​=(1−τ)pk​+τer​,τ=wr​(pk​)−1ε(pk​)​,

where rrr is an index with largest wr(pk)w_r(p_k)wr​(pk​) and ere_rer​ is the rrrth vertex of SSS: it moves weight towards the worst-covered point by the exact line-search step.

For a centrally symmetric set (A=−A\mathcal A = -\mathcal AA=−A) the ellipsoid Ep={x∣xTA(p)−1x≤1}E_p = \{x \mid x^{\mathsf T}A(p)^{-1}x \le 1\}Ep​={x∣xTA(p)−1x≤1} is the candidate rounding. For a general set the method runs on the lift A′={±(aj;1)}⊂Rn+1\mathcal A' = \{\pm(a_j;1)\} \subset \mathbb{R}^{n+1}A′={±(aj​;1)}⊂Rn+1, and the rounding ellipsoid EEE is the intersection of 1+(1+ε)n Ep′\sqrt{1 + (1+\varepsilon)n}\,E'_p1+(1+ε)n​Ep′​ with the hyperplane {y=1}\{y = 1\}{y=1}, where Ep′E'_pEp′​ is the ellipsoid (3.4) of the block matrix with blocks ∑jpjajajT\sum_j p_j a_j a_j^{\mathsf T}∑j​pj​aj​ajT​, ∑jpjaj\sum_j p_j a_j∑j​pj​aj​ and 111, and pjp_jpj​ aggregates the weights of ±(aj;1)\pm(a_j;1)±(aj​;1).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 317)

There is a universal constant CCC such that for every n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, every A={a1,…,am}\mathcal A = \{a_1,\dots,a_m\}A={a1​,…,am​} with affine hull Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 and every BCD run on A′\mathcal A'A′, some iterate pkp_kpk​ with

k≤C(n+1)(1ε+ln⁡(n+1)+ln⁡ln⁡(2m))k \le C(n+1)\Big(\frac1\varepsilon + \ln(n+1) + \ln\ln(2m)\Big)k≤C(n+1)(ε1​+ln(n+1)+lnln(2m))

meets the stopping test with ε′=nn+1ε\varepsilon' = \frac{n}{n+1}\varepsilonε′=n+1n​ε and yields an ellipsoid EEE with

[(1+ε)n]−1E⊆conv⁡(A)⊆E,[(1+\varepsilon)n]^{-1}E \subseteq \operatorname{conv}(\mathcal A) \subseteq E,[(1+ε)n]−1E⊆conv(A)⊆E,

the shrinking taken about the centre of EEE.

The centrally symmetric case: Theorem 1 (p. 314)

For centrally symmetric full-dimensional A\mathcal AA, n≥2n \ge 2n≥2: within C n(ε−1+ln⁡n+ln⁡ln⁡m)C\,n(\varepsilon^{-1} + \ln n + \ln\ln m)Cn(ε−1+lnn+lnlnm) iterations,

Epk⊆conv⁡(A)⊆(1+ε)n  Epk.E_{p_k} \subseteq \operatorname{conv}(\mathcal A) \subseteq \sqrt{(1+\varepsilon)n}\;E_{p_k}.Epk​​⊆conv(A)⊆(1+ε)n​Epk​​.

Milestones

Lemma 1 (∑jpjwj(p)=n\sum_j p_j w_j(p) = n∑j​pj​wj​(p)=n), existence of a maximizer, the line identity (2.6), the Kiefer–Wolfowitz conditions (2.9), Lemma 2(i)–(ii) (relaxed optimality gives value and rounding guarantees), Lemma 3 (the per-step increase and the gap bound), the three steps (2.25), (2.27) and the halving bound of the proof of Lemma 4, Lemma 4 (the iteration bound), the rank-one update of A(pk)−1A(p_k)^{-1}A(pk​)−1, Theorem 1, and Lemma 5 (from the lift back to A\mathcal AA). Three further items complete §4: Lemma 2(iii), the slicing property (4.1) and Theorem 3 (approximating the Löwner ellipsoid to relative volume accuracy ε\varepsilonε).

Significance

The result gives a rounding of a vertex-described polytope at nearly the cost of reading the input, using only rank-one updates; the same iteration approximates the minimum-volume enclosing ellipsoid, a basic primitive in statistics (D-optimal design, outlier detection), computational geometry (core sets) and convex optimization (initialization of interior-point and ellipsoid methods). The doubly logarithmic dependence on mmm is what makes the method practical for large point sets, and the analysis is the template for the later Frank–Wolfe-type analyses of minimum-volume ellipsoid algorithms.

The results are proved in the paper; none of them has a machine-checked proof. The platform has the Löwner–John ellipsoid itself (existence, uniqueness, John's nnn-rounding) and the concavity of ln⁡det⁡\ln\detlndet, but no algorithmic statement about it. This mission produces a verified iteration bound for a concrete method, together with the D-optimal design identities (Lemma 1, (2.6), (2.9)) and the rank-one update, which are reusable for any later formalization of optimal design or of Frank–Wolfe methods on the simplex.

Difficulty

The accuracy εk\varepsilon_kεk​ need not decrease at every step, so a bound based on per-step improvement in εk\varepsilon_kεk​ fails. The determinant objective and the geometric rounding condition are different quantities: controlling one must be shown to control the other, including the inner inclusion of the ellipsoid. For a general set, the lift changes the dimension and the relevant ellipsoid is a slice at y=1y=1y=1; the inner inclusion for this slice needs a separate geometric justification.

Formalization scope

Points are vectors Fin n → ℝ; A\mathcal AA is the range of a family a : Fin m → Fin n → ℝ (repetitions allowed). The definitions take any finite index, so they apply both to A\mathcal AA and to the lift, indexed by Fin m ⊕ Fin m. SSS is Mathlib's stdSimplex. FFF uses Real.log, which returns 000 rather than −∞-\infty−∞ on singular matrices, so every comparison of values of FFF is restricted to SFS_FSF​ and F∗F^*F∗ is the supremum over SFS_FSF​. Ellipsoids are the published LinearOptimization.ellipsoid; scaled ellipsoids about the origin use the pointwise scalar multiple, and shrinking a non-centred ellipsoid is the homothety about its centre.

Standing assumptions are hypotheses: in §2, central symmetry (2.1), full dimension (2.2) and n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 (p. 309); in §3, full dimension (3.1) and n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. Items that do not need them drop them. The BCD run is a predicate on sequences that allows any maximizing index at every step, with no tolerance parameter; the tolerance enters only through the stopping test.

Each O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) is a universal constant C>0C > 0C>0 quantified before the dimension, the points, ε\varepsilonε and the run. The paper counts arithmetic operations; the formal statements bound the index of an iterate meeting the stopping test, and the O(nm)O(nm)O(nm) cost per iteration and the O(mn2)O(mn^2)O(mn2) initialization are not formalized. The goal's bound is stated in the lifted parameters (n+1,2m)(n+1, 2m)(n+1,2m), which agrees with the page's up to the constant and stays positive at n=1n = 1n=1.

The goal assumes nothing about the run beyond its definition: the stopping test, the positive definiteness of A(pk)A(p_k)A(pk​), the rounding inclusions and the iteration bound are all conclusions. A statement in which the constant may depend on the instance, or in which a shrunken ellipsoid is scaled about the origin, would be a different, trivial or false, theorem.

Contributions welcome: the determinant and inverse identities ((2.6), Lemma 1, the rank-one update) are self-contained linear algebra; Lemma 2 needs the KKT characterisation of the minimum-volume ellipsoid; Lemma 5 is finite-dimensional convex geometry.

Selected references

  • L. G. Khachiyan, Rounding of polytopes in the real number model of computation, Mathematics of Operations Research 21(2):307–320, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.21.2.307
  • J. Kiefer, J. Wolfowitz, The equivalence of two extremum problems, Canadian Journal of Mathematics 12:363–366, 1960. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1960-030-4
  • L. G. Khachiyan, M. J. Todd, On the complexity of approximating the maximal inscribed ellipsoid for a polytope, Mathematical Programming 61:137–159, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01582144
  • M. J. Todd, E. A. Yıldırım, On Khachiyan's algorithm for the computation of minimum-volume enclosing ellipsoids, Discrete Applied Mathematics 155:1731–1744, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.dam.2007.02.013
21 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamic ProgrammingLinear OptimizationMarkov Chain+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Linear Programming and Finite Markovian Control Problems VI: Constrained Average Reward — the Limit Points of the Expected State-Action Frequencies Form the Linear Programming PolytopeTextbook

Motivation

A controller of a finite Markov chain often cares about more than one long-run quantity: an inventory manager wants a high average profit while keeping the long-run fraction of stock-outs below a target; a communication network maximizes throughput subject to bounds on average delay or power. Such problems are constrained Markov decision problems: maximize one average reward while other averages, all linear in the long-run frequencies of state-action pairs, are kept below given bounds. Unlike unconstrained problems, they need not have a pure stationary optimal policy, and in general not even a stationary one.

Derman (Finite State Markovian Decision Processes, 1970, Ch. 7) treated the case in which every stationary policy induces a chain with one ergodic class, and solved it by linear programming. Derman and Veinott (1972) proposed a decomposition algorithm for the general multichain case, remarking that until the faces of the relevant polytope are known, routine use of the simplex method is not possible. Section 4.7 of Kallenberg's 1983 monograph (CWI repository) describes that polytope explicitly for the multichain case and derives from one linear program an optimal Markov policy, with conditions under which a stationary optimal policy can be read off. Kallenberg notes that Veinott knew the characterization of the polytope by 1973.

Setting

A finite Markov decision model has a finite state set EEE, for each state iii a finite nonempty set A(i)A(i)A(i) of actions, rewards riar_{ia}ria​ and transition probabilities piaj≥0p_{iaj}\ge0piaj​≥0 with ∑jpiaj=1\sum_j p_{iaj}=1∑j​piaj​=1. A policy RRR chooses, at each time t=1,2,…t=1,2,\dotst=1,2,…, an action in A(it)A(i_t)A(it​) at random, with probabilities that may depend on the entire history (i1,a1,…,at−1,it)(i_1,a_1,\dots,a_{t-1},i_t)(i1​,a1​,…,at−1​,it​). Special classes are the Markov policies CMC_MCM​ (the rule at time ttt ignores the past), the stationary policies CSC_SCS​, written π∞\pi^\inftyπ∞ (one rule π\piπ, with πia≥0\pi_{ia}\ge0πia​≥0 and ∑aπia=1\sum_a\pi_{ia}=1∑a​πia​=1, at every time), and the pure stationary policies CDC_DCD​, written f∞f^\inftyf∞ with f(i)∈A(i)f(i)\in A(i)f(i)∈A(i). All policies form the class CCC.

Fix an initial distribution β\betaβ: βj≥0\beta_j\ge0βj​≥0 and ∑jβj=1\sum_j\beta_j=1∑j​βj​=1, with zeros allowed. The expected state-action frequencies in the first TTT periods are

xjaT(R)=1T∑t=1T∑iβi PR(Xt=j, Yt=a∣X1=i).x^T_{ja}(R)=\frac1T\sum_{t=1}^T\sum_i\beta_i\,\mathbb P_R(X_t=j,\ Y_t=a\mid X_1=i).xjaT​(R)=T1​t=1∑T​i∑​βi​PR​(Xt​=j, Yt​=a∣X1​=i).

X(R)X(R)X(R) is the set of limit points of {xT(R)}T≥1\{x^T(R)\}_{T\ge1}{xT(R)}T≥1​, and C1C_1C1​ the class of policies with exactly one limit point x(R)x(R)x(R). For a class C′C'C′, L(C′)L(C')L(C′) collects the limit points of all R∈C′R\in C'R∈C′, giving LLL, L(M)L(M)L(M), L(C)L(C)L(C) (for C1C_1C1​), L(S)L(S)L(S) and L(D)L(D)L(D). For a stationary π\piπ, P(π)ij=∑apiajπiaP(\pi)_{ij}=\sum_a p_{iaj}\pi_{ia}P(π)ij​=∑a​piaj​πia​, P∗(π)P^*(\pi)P∗(π) is its Cesàro limit, and xja(π)=[βTP∗(π)]jπjax_{ja}(\pi)=[\beta^TP^*(\pi)]_j\pi_{ja}xja​(π)=[βTP∗(π)]j​πja​.

The polytope XXX is the set of xxx for which some yyy satisfies

∑i∑a(δij−piaj)xia=0,∑axja+∑i∑a(δij−piaj)yia=βj(j∈E),x,y≥0.\sum_i\sum_a(\delta_{ij}-p_{iaj})x_{ia}=0,\qquad\sum_a x_{ja}+\sum_i\sum_a(\delta_{ij}-p_{iaj})y_{ia}=\beta_j\quad(j\in E),\qquad x,y\ge0.i∑​a∑​(δij​−piaj​)xia​=0,a∑​xja​+i∑​a∑​(δij​−piaj​)yia​=βj​(j∈E),x,y≥0.

Given constraint data qiakq_{iak}qiak​ and bkb_kbk​, the constrained problem (4.7.5) is sup⁡R∈C1{ϕ(β,R)∣∑i∑aqiakxia(R)≤bk, k=1,…,m}\sup_{R\in C_1}\{\phi(\beta,R)\mid\sum_i\sum_aq_{iak}x_{ia}(R)\le b_k,\ k=1,\dots,m\}supR∈C1​​{ϕ(β,R)∣∑i​∑a​qiak​xia​(R)≤bk​, k=1,…,m}, with ϕ(β,R)\phi(\beta,R)ϕ(β,R) the lim inf of the average expected reward, and the linear program (4.7.6) maximizes ∑i∑ariaxia\sum_i\sum_ar_{ia}x_{ia}∑i​∑a​ria​xia​ over XXX's constraints together with ∑i∑aqiakxia≤bk\sum_i\sum_aq_{iak}x_{ia}\le b_k∑i​∑a​qiak​xia​≤bk​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.7.2

L=X.L=X.L=X.

Every limit point of the expected state-action frequencies of any policy lies in the polytope XXX, and every point of XXX is such a limit point.

Milestones

  • Theorem 4.7.1. L(D)‾=L(S)‾=L(C)=L(M)=L\overline{L(D)}=\overline{L(S)}=L(C)=L(M)=LL(D)​=L(S)​=L(C)=L(M)=L, the bar being the closed convex hull.
  • Lemma 4.7.1. For R∈C1R\in C_1R∈C1​, xja(R)=lim⁡α↑1(1−α)∑t≥1αt−1∑iβiPR(Xt=j,Yt=a∣X1=i)x_{ja}(R)=\lim_{\alpha\uparrow1}(1-\alpha)\sum_{t\ge1}\alpha^{t-1}\sum_i\beta_i\mathbb P_R(X_t=j,Y_t=a\mid X_1=i)xja​(R)=limα↑1​(1−α)∑t≥1​αt−1∑i​βi​PR​(Xt​=j,Yt​=a∣X1​=i).
  • Theorem 4.7.3. Problems (4.7.5) and (4.7.6) have the same feasibility and the same optimum; an optimal policy yields an optimal x(R)x(R)x(R); a Markov policy reproducing a mixture of pure stationary policies with the optimal xxx is optimal.
  • Theorems 4.7.4–4.7.5. If the stationary rule π∗\pi^*π∗ built from an optimal (x∗,y∗)(x^*,y^*)(x∗,y∗) by (4.7.14) satisfies x∗=x(π∗)x^*=x(\pi^*)x∗=x(π∗), then (π∗)∞(\pi^*)^\infty(π∗)∞ is optimal; two sufficient conditions for x∗=x(π∗)x^*=x(\pi^*)x∗=x(π∗).
  • Theorem 4.7.9. If π↦x(π)\pi\mapsto x(\pi)π↦x(π) is continuous, then X=L(S)X=L(S)X=L(S).
  • Lemma 4.6.1 and Theorem 4.7.10. If every pure stationary policy is unichain, so is every stationary one, and then X=L(S)X=L(S)X=L(S).

Significance

The goal identifies the set of achievable long-run behaviours of a multichain Markov decision process with a polytope given by 2∣E∣2|E|2∣E∣ linear equations. Any objective and any constraints that are linear in the frequencies then become one linear program (Theorem 4.7.3), and optimal policies are recovered from its solution. This is the basis of the linear programming approach to constrained average-reward control, later developed by Altman (Constrained Markov Decision Processes, 1999) and others.

The results of this section are proved in the monograph; none has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces a formal account of state-action frequencies under history-dependent policies on a finite model, their limit points, and the multichain LP polytope. The unichain special case is related to Derman's statements posed on the platform (DermanSeqDecisions.LinProg.*, completely ergodic models); the multichain statements here are not posed elsewhere.

Difficulty

The inclusion L⊆XL\subseteq XL⊆X needs a limit point of a history-dependent policy to satisfy the second family of equations, which involves the auxiliary vector yyy; for stationary policies yyy comes from the deviation matrix, but a general policy has no such matrix. The reverse inclusion cannot be obtained by realizing each x∈Xx\in Xx∈X with a stationary policy: Example 4.7.1 of the book exhibits a model where L(S)≠XL(S)\neq XL(S)=X, and a point of L(D)L(D)L(D) that is not an extreme point of XXX. The natural candidate, the stationary rule xia/∑axiax_{ia}/\sum_ax_{ia}xia​/∑a​xia​, is not defined on states with ∑axia=0\sum_a x_{ia}=0∑a​xia​=0, and filling in yyy there does not in general reproduce xxx (Theorem 4.7.5 gives conditions under which it does). In the converse direction, frequencies of general policies need not converge, so arguments must work with all limit points, not with a limit.

Formalization scope

  • The model is the platform definition MarkovDecisionProcesses_AverageReward (reference item): StationaryMDP S A with finite state type S, a common finite action type A, a nonempty admissible Finset per state, rewards, and transition rows that sum to one; policies are its AvgHRPolicy, history-dependent and randomized. Frequency vectors are indexed by the admissible pairs.
  • PR(Xt=j,Yt=a∣X1=i)\mathbb P_R(X_t=j,Y_t=a\mid X_1=i)PR​(Xt​=j,Yt​=a∣X1​=i) is a finite recursive sum over histories; no measure theory is used. Lean's time index starts at 000 (the book's t−1t-1t−1).
  • X(R)X(R)X(R) is the set of limits of convergent subsequences of xT(R)x^T(R)xT(R). Policy classes are predicates that constrain only the weights of admissible actions.
  • P∗P^*P∗ is the limUnder of the Cesàro means 1n∑k=1nPk\frac1n\sum_{k=1}^nP^kn1​∑k=1n​Pk; its existence is the book's Theorem 2.4.1(i) and is not assumed as a hypothesis.
  • β\betaβ is a probability vector with zeros allowed; β≫0\beta\gg0β≫0 is never assumed.
  • The optima in Theorem 4.7.3 are compared in the extended reals, so the infeasible case reads −∞=−∞-\infty=-\infty−∞=−∞.
  • "One ergodic set" is the platform's IsUnichainMatrix (any two recurrent states communicate); Assumption 4.7.1 is IsUnichain.
  • Trivializing formalization ruled out: LLL ranges over all history-dependent randomized policies. Restricting it to stationary policies would replace LLL by L(S)L(S)L(S), for which L(S)=XL(S)=XL(S)=X fails in general.

A complete development needs Cesàro limits of stochastic matrices (Theorem 2.4.1), the stationary-policy correspondence of §4.3, a separating hyperplane in finite dimension, and the Derman–Strauch construction of a Markov policy matching a mixture of policies (Theorem 2.5.1). The frequency and limit-point infrastructure is reusable for any average-reward model on a finite state space. Proofs of any milestone, and of the auxiliary facts above as separate theorems, are welcome.

Selected references

  • L.C.M. Kallenberg, Linear Programming and Finite Markovian Control Problems, Mathematical Centre Tracts 148, Mathematisch Centrum, Amsterdam, 1983. https://ir.cwi.nl/pub/13008
  • C. Derman, Finite State Markovian Decision Processes, Academic Press, New York, 1970.
  • C. Derman and A.F. Veinott, Constrained Markov decision chains, Management Science 19 (1972), 389–390. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.19.4.389
  • C. Derman and R.E. Strauch, A note on memoryless rules for controlling sequential control problems, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 37 (1966), 276–278. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699617
  • E. Altman, Constrained Markov Decision Processes, Chapman & Hall/CRC, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1201/9781315140223
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Revenue Management Under a General Discrete Choice Model of Consumer Behavior 1: The Optimal Policy Offers Only Nondominated Sets, a Larger One the More Capacity and the Less Time RemainResearch Paper

Why offer sets matter

A seller with one limited inventory pool can choose which fare products to show in each selling period. When customers choose among the displayed products, showing another fare can both add sales and divert buyers from a more expensive fare. A fixed ranking of fares therefore does not by itself tell the seller which products to offer. Talluri and van Ryzin's working paper studies the optimal offer decision under a general discrete choice model, without specifying a logit or independent-demand formula for customer choice (working paper, 2001, pp. 5–8; published article, 2004). The present mission concerns the paper's first main result: how to reduce the collection of possible offer sets and how the best choice changes with inventory and time.

Model and notation

There are nnn fare products, indexed by N={1,…,n}N=\{1,\ldots,n\}N={1,…,n}. Product jjj earns a nonnegative revenue rjr_jrj​. In each period, a customer arrives with probability λ∈[0,1]\lambda\in[0,1]λ∈[0,1], independent of the remaining time. The seller offers a set S⊆NS\subseteq NS⊆N. Conditional on arrival, the customer buys product j∈Sj\in Sj∈S with probability Pj(S)P_j(S)Pj​(S) or buys nothing with the remaining probability. Thus Pj(S)≥0P_j(S)\ge0Pj​(S)≥0 and Q(S)=∑j∈SPj(S)≤1Q(S)=\sum_{j\in S}P_j(S)\le1Q(S)=∑j∈S​Pj​(S)≤1. The purchase probability is Q(S)Q(S)Q(S), while the expected revenue conditional on arrival is R(S)=∑j∈SPj(S)rjR(S)=\sum_{j\in S}P_j(S)r_jR(S)=∑j∈S​Pj​(S)rj​. The empty set is a possible offer; it has Q=R=0Q=R=0Q=R=0.

Time is counted backward: ttt is the number of periods still available, and xxx is the number of inventory units left. Let Vt(x)V_t(x)Vt​(x) be the maximum expected revenue from that state, with V0(x)=Vt(0)=0V_0(x)=V_t(0)=0V0​(x)=Vt​(0)=0. For t,x≥1t,x\ge1t,x≥1, the marginal value of capacity is ΔVt−1(x)=Vt−1(x)−Vt−1(x−1)\Delta V_{t-1}(x)=V_{t-1}(x)-V_{t-1}(x-1)ΔVt−1​(x)=Vt−1​(x)−Vt−1​(x−1). The Bellman equation is

Vt(x)=Vt−1(x)+max⁡S⊆Nλ(R(S)−Q(S)ΔVt−1(x)).V_t(x)=V_{t-1}(x)+\max_{S\subseteq N}\lambda\bigl(R(S)-Q(S)\Delta V_{t-1}(x)\bigr).Vt​(x)=Vt−1​(x)+S⊆Nmax​λ(R(S)−Q(S)ΔVt−1​(x)).

The paper calls a set TTT dominated if a randomization over offer sets achieves either strictly more expected revenue with no greater purchase probability, or no less expected revenue with strictly lower purchase probability. A set is nondominated if neither comparison applies. This two-clause definition is specific to the paper. It differs from the one-clause “efficient set” used for a related model in Talluri and van Ryzin's book; the published formalization of that book's optimal policy theorem is therefore related work rather than a replacement for this goal.

Formalization targets

Nondominated frontier

Proposition 1 characterizes the nondominated sets by a positive tradeoff value vvv: a set TTT lies on the relevant frontier exactly when it maximizes R(S)−vQ(S)R(S)-vQ(S)R(S)−vQ(S) for some v>0v>0v>0. Proposition 2 says that dominated sets can be excluded from the Bellman maximization when ΔVt−1(x)>0\Delta V_{t-1}(x)>0ΔVt−1​(x)>0, and that a nondominated optimum exists when the marginal value is zero. Proposition 3 orders the nondominated sets S1,…,SmS_1,\ldots,S_mS1​,…,Sm​ so that both Qk=Q(Sk)Q_k=Q(S_k)Qk​=Q(Sk​) and Rk=R(Sk)R_k=R(S_k)Rk​=R(Sk​) are nondecreasing (working paper, pp. 8–12).

Largest optimal index

Among indices maximizing Rk−QkvR_k-Q_kvRk​−Qk​v, let k∗(v)k^*(v)k∗(v) be the greatest one when there are ties. Lemmas 1 and 2 say that k∗(v)k^*(v)k∗(v) is nonincreasing in vvv. The paper's Lemmas 3 and 4 say that marginal capacity values decrease as inventory increases and increase as the number of remaining periods increases. For the admissible states t,x≥1t,x\ge1t,x≥1, the goal is Theorem 1:

Vt(x)=Vt−1(x)+λ(Rk∗−Qk∗ΔVt−1(x)),V_t(x)=V_{t-1}(x)+\lambda\bigl(R_{k^*}-Q_{k^*}\Delta V_{t-1}(x)\bigr),Vt​(x)=Vt−1​(x)+λ(Rk∗​−Qk∗​ΔVt−1​(x)),

where Sk∗S_{k^*}Sk∗​ is an optimal offer, and the greatest optimal index k∗k^*k∗ is nondecreasing in xxx and nonincreasing in ttt (working paper, pp. 12–15, Theorem 1). These are claims about the index in the nondominated ordering; the offer sets themselves need not be nested by inclusion.

What the result gives

Theorem 1 replaces a search over all 2n2^n2n offer sets at each state with a search over the nondominated sets. It also tells an operator how the preferred position in that ordered list changes as seats are sold or as the selling horizon shortens. The later sections of the paper add conditions under which this ordering corresponds to fare-order nesting; those conditions are treated in separate missions (working paper, §3).

The model's value recursion and the marginal-value inequalities already have published Prove2Me formalizations in the Talluri–van Ryzin book setting. The book's marginal-value theorem is proved and serves here as a referenced milestone after reindexing its forward time convention. The paper's two-clause dominance concept, its ordered frontier, and Theorem 1 itself remain the formalization work of this mission. Keeping those distinctions explicit makes the resulting definitions reusable for other choice models with the same purchase and revenue coordinates.

Main difficulty

A set with high expected revenue need not be attractive when capacity is scarce: it may also consume inventory more often. Ranking sets by revenue alone therefore fails. Conversely, an offer set can tie another at a single marginal value, so selecting an arbitrary maximizer does not give a monotone index across states. The paper resolves ties by taking the greatest optimal index. Formalization must also retain the full randomized dominance relation: using only strict revenue improvement would leave sets on the wrong frontier. These issues arise even with finitely many products and without a specialized formula for Pj(S)P_j(S)Pj​(S).

Formalization scope

Products are Fin n, and offers are finite subsets of them. The published RevenueManagement_singleResource definition supplies the choice-model predicate, QQQ, RRR, and the backward value recursion. This mission defines the paper's own dominance relation, stage objective, exhaustive ordered list of nondominated sets, and greatest-maximizer predicate. Every possible offer set, including the empty set, participates in the Bellman maximum. The list must contain all nondominated sets exactly once; otherwise choosing from it would weaken Theorem 1.

The assumptions 0≤λ≤10\le\lambda\le10≤λ≤1 and rj≥0r_j\ge0rj​≥0 are the model's arrival-probability and nonnegative-fare conventions. The paper indexes fares in decreasing order, but Section 2's claims do not use that order, so the Lean targets omit it. Proposition 2's assertion that a dominated set is never optimal requires λ>0\lambda>0λ>0; that condition is placed on that clause alone. Decisions and marginal values are stated for t,x≥1t,x\ge1t,x≥1. The paper prints Lemma 3 also at x=1x=1x=1, where its right side ΔVt(0)\Delta V_t(0)ΔVt​(0) is undefined; the referenced formalization states the meaningful range x≥2x\ge2x≥2. The imported book theorem uses forward time, reindexed here as the number of periods remaining. The goal does not assume the dominance reduction or the marginal-value monotonicities that its milestones supply.

A complete development uses finite sums and maxima, the choice-value recursion, a finite frontier argument for Proposition 1, and order properties of the stage objective. The dominance and ordered-frontier definitions can support later results on nested policies. Contributions that establish the stated milestones under the same conventions are within scope.

Selected references

  • K. Talluri and G. van Ryzin, Revenue Management Under a General Discrete Choice Model of Consumer Behavior, UPF Economics Working Paper 533, October 21, 2001, pp. 5–15. Working paper.
  • K. Talluri and G. van Ryzin, Revenue Management Under a General Discrete Choice Model of Consumer Behavior, Management Science 50(1), 2004, pp. 15–33. DOI: 10.1287/mnsc.1030.0147.
10 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

In-Process Inventories: The Base-Stock Cost c + Σ rᵢ√(Sᵢ₋₁ − Sᵢ + Tᵢ) over the Service Times Attains Its Minimum at a Vertex of the Feasible PolyhedronResearch Paper

Where in-process inventories should sit

A product made by a chain of nnn operations can carry stock in front of every operation, between every pair of them, and as finished goods. Each such inventory point buffers demand uncertainty, and each costs money to hold. Kenneth F. Simpson, Jr. asked which of these points should carry stock at all, and how much, in In-Process Inventories, Operations Research 6 (1958) 863–873. His answer is that the cheapest configuration is an extreme one: every inventory point is either kept full or eliminated.

The paper is the origin of what is now called the guaranteed-service model of multi-echelon inventory theory.

  • 1958: Simpson proves that the optimal service times lie at a vertex of the feasible polyhedron, for a serial line, and notes extensions to branching chains and to correlated demand.
  • 2000: Graves and Willems (Optimizing Strategic Safety Stock Placement in Supply Chains, M&SOM 2(1)) extend the service-time formulation to spanning-tree networks and solve it by dynamic programming over the vertex structure.
  • Textbooks (Snyder and Shen, Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory, Wiley) present the serial result as the "all-or-nothing" property of guaranteed-service systems.

The model

There are nnn operations in series. Operation iii has a processing time TiT_iTi​. Behind each operation is an inventory point that promises to fill any order within a service time Si≥0S_i \ge 0Si​≥0. The incoming service time S0S_0S0​ (from raw materials) and the outgoing one SnS_nSn​ (to the customer) are fixed constants; the n−1n - 1n−1 intermediate service times S1,…,Sn−1S_1, \dots, S_{n-1}S1​,…,Sn−1​ are the decision variables. Inventory iii must protect against demand over the time Si−1−Si+TiS_{i-1} - S_i + T_iSi−1​−Si​+Ti​, and under the paper's demand model its holding cost is proportional to the square root of that time. With constants ccc and r1,…,rn>0r_1, \dots, r_n > 0r1​,…,rn​>0 the total inventory cost is equation (9):

f(S1,…,Sn−1)=c+∑i=1nriSi−1−Si+Ti.f(S_1, \dots, S_{n-1}) = c + \sum_{i=1}^{n} r_i \sqrt{S_{i-1} - S_i + T_i}.f(S1​,…,Sn−1​)=c+i=1∑n​ri​Si−1​−Si​+Ti​​.

Its domain D⊆Rn−1D \subseteq \mathbb R^{n-1}D⊆Rn−1 is the set of points with every variable nonnegative and every radicand nonnegative:

D={(S1,…,Sn−1):Si≥0 (1≤i≤n−1),  Si−1−Si+Ti≥0 (1≤i≤n)}.D = \{ (S_1, \dots, S_{n-1}) : S_i \ge 0 \ (1 \le i \le n - 1),\ \ S_{i-1} - S_i + T_i \ge 0 \ (1 \le i \le n) \}.D={(S1​,…,Sn−1​):Si​≥0 (1≤i≤n−1),  Si−1​−Si​+Ti​≥0 (1≤i≤n)}.

DDD is a polyhedron cut out by 2n−12n - 12n−1 affine inequalities. A vertex of DDD is an extreme point: a point of DDD that is not the midpoint of two distinct points of DDD. An inventory with Si=Si−1+TiS_i = S_{i-1} + T_iSi​=Si−1​+Ti​ has zero average stock; one with Si=0S_i = 0Si​=0 is full.

Formalization targets

Goal: THEOREM I (p. 869)

For any constants c,S0,Sn,Tic, S_0, S_n, T_ic,S0​,Sn​,Ti​ and ri>0r_i > 0ri​>0 with D≠∅D \ne \emptysetD=∅,

∃ v∈ext⁡Dwithf(v)≤f(S)  for all S∈D.\exists\, v \in \operatorname{ext} D \quad\text{with}\quad f(v) \le f(S)\ \ \text{for all } S \in D.∃v∈extDwithf(v)≤f(S)  for all S∈D.

This is the paper's sentence "the minimum of the function fff occurs at one of the vertices of DDD", read as existence of a vertex minimizer. It fixes no constant and no particular vertex.

Milestones

  1. DDD is convex and compact (pp. 868, 872).
  2. fff is concave on DDD when ri≥0r_i \ge 0ri​≥0 (p. 868, "concave downward").
  3. fff attains its minimum on a nonempty DDD (Appendix, p. 872).
  4. LEMMA I (p. 872): for at least one variable, no interior point of DDD minimizes fff.
  5. THEOREM II (p. 869): if Sj=Sj−1+TjS_j = S_{j-1} + T_jSj​=Sj−1​+Tj​, the cost equals the cost of the model with operations jjj and j+1j+1j+1 coupled into one with processing time Tj+Tj+1T_j + T_{j+1}Tj​+Tj+1​.
  6. LEMMA II (pp. 872–873): for at least two variables, every minimizer has at least two independent active boundary normals.
  7. Meaning of the theorem (p. 869): when S0=Sn=0S_0 = S_n = 0S0​=Sn​=0 and Ti>0T_i > 0Ti​>0, the vertices of DDD are exactly the 2n−12^{n-1}2n−1 points with each Si∈{0, Si−1+Ti}S_i \in \{0,\ S_{i-1} + T_i\}Si​∈{0, Si−1​+Ti​}.
  8. Extension (p. 871): THEOREM I holds with t\sqrt{t}t​ replaced by tkt^ktk for 12≤k≤1\tfrac12 \le k \le 121​≤k≤1.

The p. 870 rephrasing, "for an optimal system, the service time for every nonvanishing inventory is zero", is already proved on the platform as SupplyChainTheory.gs_all_or_nothing (Snyder–Shen Theorem 6.5) and is included as a reference item. Under the dictionary stage i↔n+1−ii \leftrightarrow n + 1 - ii↔n+1−i, ri=hikr_i = h_i kri​=hi​k, SIN=S0SI_N = S_0SIN​=S0​, that statement is Simpson's model case Sn=0S_n = 0Sn​=0.

Significance

THEOREM I turns a continuous optimization over the polyhedron DDD into a comparison over its finitely many vertices, and in Simpson's model these are the 2n−12^{n-1}2n−1 all-or-nothing configurations. Each vertex has a physical reading as a mode of operation: which inventories are kept full and which operations are tightly coupled (THEOREM II). The property is what makes guaranteed-service models tractable by enumeration or dynamic programming in later work.

The result is proved in the paper, by an induction on faces. It has not been machine-checked. A formal development adds a checked statement of the theorem for general constants S0,Sn,TiS_0, S_n, T_iS0​,Sn​,Ti​ (the paper's model fixes S0=Sn=0S_0 = S_n = 0S0​=Sn​=0), an exact account of which hypotheses are needed (the positivity of the rir_iri​ is essential, see below), and a checked vertex count for the model case. The existing platform theorem gs_all_or_nothing covers the model case in the all-or-nothing form; THEOREM I with general constants and the vertex characterization are not yet on the platform.

Difficulty

The domain DDD is given by inequalities, while the conclusion is about its extreme points, which are never listed: with general constants S0,Sn,TiS_0, S_n, T_iS0​,Sn​,Ti​ the vertices of DDD have no closed form, and DDD may be lower-dimensional or have coinciding facets. Any argument therefore has to connect an inequality description of a polyhedron with its extreme-point structure, which in the paper's own text is treated informally ("faces", "edges", "an nnn-fold repetition"). LEMMA I and LEMMA II are stronger than the existence statement: they exclude minimizers in the interior of DDD and in the relative interior of a face, and they become false as soon as some rir_iri​ vanishes, so they cannot follow from concavity alone. THEOREM II, though described on the page as "examine the definitions", requires an exact reindexing of the operations, processing times and cost coefficients after one variable is removed.

The sign hypothesis cannot be dropped: with n=2n = 2n=2, r1=r2=−1r_1 = r_2 = -1r1​=r2​=−1, S0=0S_0 = 0S0​=0, S2=1S_2 = 1S2​=1, T1=2T_1 = 2T1​=2, T2=1T_2 = 1T2​=1, the function f(S1)=−2−S1−S1f(S_1) = -\sqrt{2 - S_1} - \sqrt{S_1}f(S1​)=−2−S1​​−S1​​ on D=[0,2]D = [0, 2]D=[0,2] is convex and its only minimizer is the interior point S1=1S_1 = 1S1​=1.

Formalization scope

All declarations live in SimpsonInv.Vertex. With m=n−1m = n - 1m=n−1 variables a point of DDD is S : Fin m → ℝ, and Lean index jjj holds the paper's Sj+1S_{j+1}Sj+1​; extVec S0 Sn S i returns the paper's SiS_iSi​ for every iii, including the constant ends. The constants T,rT, rT,r are sequences ℕ → ℝ, read only at indices 1,…,n1, \dots, n1,…,n. The space Fin m → ℝ carries the product topology, which is the Euclidean one, so interior is the paper's interior. A vertex is an element of Set.extremePoints ℝ D; a minimizer is IsMinOn f D v with v∈Dv \in Dv∈D.

Added hypotheses, each disclosed in its item: ri>0r_i > 0ri​>0 for 1≤i≤n1 \le i \le n1≤i≤n (from equation (8); weakened to ri≥0r_i \ge 0ri​≥0 for concavity and dropped for existence and THEOREM II); D≠∅D \ne \emptysetD=∅ where a minimum is asserted; at least one variable for LEMMA I and at least two for LEMMA II; S0=Sn=0S_0 = S_n = 0S0​=Sn​=0 and Ti>0T_i > 0Ti​>0 only for the vertex count, as in the paper's model. The page's "n−1n-1n−1-dimensional polyhedron" is not imposed: the goal is stated for every nonempty DDD. "On the boundary of the faces" (LEMMA II) is encoded by at least two independent active inequality normals, including when inequalities coincide.

Real.sqrt returns 000 on negative inputs, so fff is never compared outside DDD. Minimizing over all of Rn−1\mathbb R^{n-1}Rn−1, or replacing the vertex set by a hand-listed finite set of points, would trivialize or falsify the goal and is ruled out: the goal quantifies over Set.extremePoints ℝ D and compares only on DDD. THEOREM II compares the original cost with the same cost function applied to new data (n−1n - 1n−1 operations, T′T'T′, r′r'r′), not with a substituted copy of the original.

A complete development needs compactness and extreme-point facts for polyhedra given by inequalities and concavity facts for square roots and powers of affine maps; both are reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone, and reusable lemmas on polyhedra given by inequalities, are welcome.

Selected references

  • Kenneth F. Simpson, Jr., In-Process Inventories, Operations Research 6(6):863–873, 1958. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.6.6.863
  • Stephen C. Graves and Sean P. Willems, Optimizing Strategic Safety Stock Placement in Supply Chains, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 2(1):68–83, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.2.1.68.23267
  • Lawrence V. Snyder and Zuo-Jun Max Shen, Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory, 2nd ed., Wiley, 2019 (Chapter 6, guaranteed-service serial systems).
11 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Loss Networks 2: The Erlang Fixed Point Is E_j = 1 − exp(−y_j) for the Unique Optimum y of the Strictly Convex Revised Dual ProblemResearch Paper

Motivation

A loss network is a model of a circuit-switched network: telephone networks, and more generally any system in which a request seizes several resources at once and is lost if any of them is unavailable. Exact loss probabilities in such networks are given by a product-form distribution over a state space whose size grows exponentially with the number of routes, so practitioners compute an approximation instead: the Erlang fixed point, also called the reduced-load approximation. It pretends that links block independently, computes the traffic offered to each link after thinning by the other links, and applies Erlang's single-link formula link by link. Reduced-load approximations of this kind recur throughout §§3–4 of Kelly 1991, where they appear as limits of networks with fixed and with alternative routing.

An approximation defined by a fixed point equation raises an immediate question: does the equation have exactly one solution? Under fixed routing it does, and Kelly's Theorem 3.7 (Ann. Appl. Probab. 1991, p. 338, citing Kelly 1986, reference [33] of the paper) proves it by identifying the fixed point with the optimum of a strictly convex program, the revised dual problem. The convex characterization is specific to fixed routing; the paper notes (p. 337) that for networks with dynamic routing and control nonuniquely determined behaviour can occur.

Setting

There are JJJ links, link jjj having Cj≥1C_j \ge 1Cj​≥1 circuits, and a finite set of routes rrr. A call on route rrr uses Ajr∈Z+A_{jr} \in \mathbb Z_+Ajr​∈Z+​ circuits of link jjj, and calls on route rrr arrive as a Poisson stream of rate νr>0\nu_r > 0νr​>0.

Erlang's formula (1.1) gives the blocking probability of a single link with CCC circuits offered Poisson traffic of intensity ν\nuν:

E(ν,C)=νCC![∑n=0Cνnn!]−1.E(\nu, C) = \frac{\nu^C}{C!}\Big[\sum_{n=0}^{C} \frac{\nu^n}{n!}\Big]^{-1}.E(ν,C)=C!νC​[n=0∑C​n!νn​]−1.

The Erlang fixed point equations (3.1)–(3.2) for the vector of link blocking probabilities (E1,…,EJ)(E_1, \dots, E_J)(E1​,…,EJ​) are

Ej=E(ρj,Cj),ρj=(1−Ej)−1∑rAjr νr∏i(1−Ei)Air,j=1,…,J.E_j = E(\rho_j, C_j), \qquad \rho_j = (1 - E_j)^{-1} \sum_r A_{jr}\,\nu_r \prod_i (1 - E_i)^{A_{ir}}, \qquad j = 1, \dots, J.Ej​=E(ρj​,Cj​),ρj​=(1−Ej​)−1r∑​Ajr​νr​i∏​(1−Ei​)Air​,j=1,…,J.

The utilization function U(y,C)U(y, C)U(y,C) is defined by the implicit relation (3.4),

U(−log⁡(1−E(ν,C)), C)=ν (1−E(ν,C)),ν≥0:U\big(-\log(1 - E(\nu, C)),\, C\big) = \nu\,\big(1 - E(\nu, C)\big), \qquad \nu \ge 0:U(−log(1−E(ν,C)),C)=ν(1−E(ν,C)),ν≥0:

the mean number of busy circuits on a single link whose blocking probability is 1−e−y1 - e^{-y}1−e−y.

The revised dual problem (3.5) is

minimize∑rνrexp⁡(−∑jyjAjr)+∑j∫0yjU(z,Cj) dzsubject to y≥0,\text{minimize} \quad \sum_r \nu_r \exp\Big(-\sum_j y_j A_{jr}\Big) + \sum_j \int_0^{y_j} U(z, C_j)\,dz \qquad \text{subject to } y \ge 0,minimizer∑​νr​exp(−j∑​yj​Ajr​)+j∑​∫0yj​​U(z,Cj​)dzsubject to y≥0,

and its stationarity conditions (3.6) are

∑rAjr νrexp⁡(−∑iyiAir)=U(yj,Cj),j=1,…,J.\sum_r A_{jr}\,\nu_r \exp\Big(-\sum_i y_i A_{ir}\Big) = U(y_j, C_j), \qquad j = 1, \dots, J.r∑​Ajr​νr​exp(−i∑​yi​Air​)=U(yj​,Cj​),j=1,…,J.

The revised dual differs from the dual problem (2.3) of §2, whose optimum gives the limiting blocking probabilities of a large network, only in its last term: ∑jyjCj\sum_j y_j C_j∑j​yj​Cj​ becomes ∑j∫0yjU(z,Cj) dz\sum_j \int_0^{y_j} U(z, C_j)\,dz∑j​∫0yj​​U(z,Cj​)dz.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.7

The revised dual problem (3.5) has an optimum yyy, every optimum equals yyy, and

E∈[0,1]J solves (3.1)–(3.2)  ⟺  Ej=1−exp⁡(−yj) for every j.E \in [0,1]^J \text{ solves (3.1)–(3.2)} \iff E_j = 1 - \exp(-y_j) \text{ for every } j.E∈[0,1]J solves (3.1)–(3.2)⟺Ej​=1−exp(−yj​) for every j.

The goal states the characterization, not only the existence and uniqueness of the fixed point: the solution is 1−e−y1 - e^{-y}1−e−y for the optimum yyy of (3.5).

Milestones (p. 338, in the order the argument uses them)

  1. (3.4) defines a function: ν↦−log⁡(1−E(ν,C))\nu \mapsto -\log(1 - E(\nu, C))ν↦−log(1−E(ν,C)) is a continuous strictly increasing bijection of [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) onto itself for C≥1C \ge 1C≥1, UUU satisfies (3.4), and U≥0U \ge 0U≥0.
  2. y↦U(y,C)y \mapsto U(y, C)y↦U(y,C) is strictly increasing on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞).
  3. y↦∫0yU(z,C) dzy \mapsto \int_0^y U(z, C)\,dzy↦∫0y​U(z,C)dz is strictly convex, and so is the objective of (3.5) on y≥0y \ge 0y≥0.
  4. (3.5) has exactly one optimum.
  5. A vector y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 is optimal for (3.5) if and only if it satisfies (3.6).
  6. A solution of (3.1)–(3.2) in [0,1]J[0,1]^J[0,1]J has all Ej<1E_j < 1Ej​<1; and for y≥0y \ge 0y≥0, Ej=1−e−yjE_j = 1 - e^{-y_j}Ej​=1−e−yj​ solves (3.1)–(3.2) if and only if yyy satisfies (3.6).

Significance

The theorem turns a nonlinear system of JJJ equations into a smooth strictly convex minimization over the nonnegative orthant. Uniqueness of the fixed point follows at once, and the program gives a computational handle: any convex-minimization method computes the Erlang fixed point, without relying on the convergence of repeated substitution. The comparison with the dual problem (2.3) also explains the approximation: (3.6) relaxes the conditions (2.7), which force a link's carried traffic to equal its capacity before it can block, into a smooth relation in which blocking grows with carried traffic as Erlang's formula prescribes (Remark 3.8).

On Prove2Me, existence and uniqueness of the fixed point alone is already the Proved theorem KellyStochasticNetworks.erlang_fixed_point_unique (Kelly–Yudovina, Stochastic Networks, Theorem 3.20), referenced by this mission. Also referenced: KellyStochasticNetworks.erlang_strictMono (Proved: ν↦E(ν,C)\nu \mapsto E(\nu, C)ν↦E(ν,C) and ν↦ν(1−E(ν,C))\nu \mapsto \nu(1 - E(\nu, C))ν↦ν(1−E(ν,C)) are strictly increasing for C≥1C \ge 1C≥1) and KellyStochasticNetworks.erlang_mean_busy_circuits (Proved: the mean number of busy circuits is ν(1−E(ν,C))\nu(1 - E(\nu, C))ν(1−E(ν,C)), the reading of UUU as a utilization). What this mission adds is the revised dual problem itself, the utilization function UUU, and the identification of the fixed point with the optimum of (3.5); none of these is formalized on the platform.

Difficulty

The function UUU is defined only implicitly, through the inverse of ν↦−log⁡(1−E(ν,C))\nu \mapsto -\log(1 - E(\nu, C))ν↦−log(1−E(ν,C)), so every property of the objective of (3.5) passes through properties of Erlang's formula: monotonicity, continuity, and the limit E(ν,C)→1E(\nu, C) \to 1E(ν,C)→1 as ν→∞\nu \to \inftyν→∞. Differentiating ∫0yU\int_0^{y} U∫0y​U needs continuity of UUU, which must be derived from the inverse.

The paper's sentence "strictly convex: it thus has a unique minimum" covers only uniqueness. Existence of a minimizer on the unbounded set y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 is a separate fact, a growth estimate for the integral terms, and it is part of milestone 4. The first term of (3.5) is not strictly convex when AAA has rank less than JJJ, so strict convexity must come from the separable integral terms. Finally, optimality over y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 yields only one-sided conditions at coordinates with yj=0y_j = 0yj​=0; that (3.6) is an equality there uses U(0,C)=0U(0, C) = 0U(0,C)=0.

Formalization scope

Lean namespace KellyLossNetworks.RevisedDual. Links are Fin J, routes Fin R, the incidence matrix is A : Fin J → Fin R → ℕ, rates ν : Fin R → ℝ, capacities C : Fin J → ℕ, following the published Kelly–Yudovina definitions. Every statement assumes νr>0\nu_r > 0νr​>0 and Cj≥1C_j \ge 1Cj​≥1; the paper uses both without stating them, and a link with Cj=0C_j = 0Cj​=0 makes (3.4) meaningless, since E(ν,0)=1E(\nu, 0) = 1E(ν,0)=1.

Erlang's formula is the published KellyStochasticNetworks.erlang and the fixed point equations (3.1)–(3.2) are the published KellyStochasticNetworks.ErlangFixedPoint, whose factor (1−Ej)−1(1 - E_j)^{-1}(1−Ej​)−1 is Lean's total inverse; milestone 6 shows that no solution in [0,1]J[0,1]^J[0,1]J reaches Ej=1E_j = 1Ej​=1. Solutions are sought in [0,1]J[0,1]^J[0,1]J, as on p. 338.

UUU is defined by choice: U(y,C)=ν(1−E(ν,C))U(y, C) = \nu(1 - E(\nu, C))U(y,C)=ν(1−E(ν,C)) for a ν≥0\nu \ge 0ν≥0 with −log⁡(1−E(ν,C))=y-\log(1 - E(\nu, C)) = y−log(1−E(ν,C))=y, and 000 if none exists. For C≥1C \ge 1C≥1, y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 the ν\nuν is unique, and that (3.4) holds is milestone 1, a theorem, not an axiom built into the definition. Values at y<0y < 0y<0 or C=0C = 0C=0 are placeholders that no statement uses. The integral in (3.5) is the interval integral ∫0yj\int_0^{y_j}∫0yj​​. An optimum of (3.5) is a y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 whose objective value is at most that of every z≥0z \ge 0z≥0.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: replacing UUU by any closed form other than the one fixed by (3.4) (for instance U(z,C)=CU(z, C) = CU(z,C)=C, the fluid utilization of Remark 3.8) would change the problem and reduce (3.5) to the dual (2.3); and the goal asserts the identification E=1−e−yE = 1 - e^{-y}E=1−e−y rather than restating the existence and uniqueness that is already Proved.

A complete development needs: inverse-function arguments for a strictly increasing continuous map of [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞), derivatives of interval integrals with continuous integrands, strict convexity of separable sums, and first-order optimality conditions for convex functions on the nonnegative orthant. The facts about Erlang's formula and about UUU are reusable in any reduced-load analysis. Proofs of individual milestones are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • F. P. Kelly, Loss networks, The Annals of Applied Probability 1(3):319–378, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005872
  • F. P. Kelly, Blocking probabilities in large circuit-switched networks, Advances in Applied Probability 18:473–505, 1986 (reference [33] of Kelly 1991; DOI not verified offline).
  • F. P. Kelly and E. Yudovina, Stochastic Networks, Cambridge University Press, 2014 (the source of the Proved platform items referenced here; DOI not verified offline).
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

The Computational Algorithm for the Parametric Objective Function: The Basis Entered at a Characteristic Value λ̄ Is Optimal on an Interval Whose Left Endpoint Is λ̄Research Paper

Motivation

A linear program often has two objectives that pull in different directions, for example cost and risk, or two policy goals whose relative weight is a matter of judgment. Gass and Saaty (NRLQ 1955) put the question in its simplest form: let every cost coefficient be an affine function dj+λdj′d_j + \lambda d'_jdj​+λdj′​ of one real parameter λ\lambdaλ, and find, for every value of λ\lambdaλ, an optimal solution. Their paper turned this into a procedure that runs the simplex method once and then walks along the λ\lambdaλ-axis, changing one basis column at a time. This parametric objective function method became a standard chapter of linear programming texts and is the prototype of parametric and sensitivity analysis in optimization software.

Timeline.

  • 1951: Dantzig publishes the simplex method (Cowles Commission Monograph No. 13, Ch. XXI; the paper's reference [1]), with the optimality test zj−cj≤0z_j - c_j \le 0zj​−cj​≤0 for a minimization problem.
  • 1954: Gass and Saaty summarize the parametric procedure (J. Oper. Res. Soc. Amer. 2 (1954), 316–319).
  • 1955: the present paper gives the procedure in detail, proves the THEOREM that makes it work, and reports computations on the National Bureau of Standards SEAC computer.

Setting

For each real λ\lambdaλ the problem is

minimize ∑j=1n(dj+λdj′) xjsubject toxj≥0 (j=1,…,n),∑j=1naijxj=ai0 (i=1,…,m).\text{minimize } \sum_{j=1}^n (d_j + \lambda d'_j)\,x_j \quad\text{subject to}\quad x_j \ge 0\ (j = 1,\dots,n),\qquad \sum_{j=1}^n a_{ij}x_j = a_{i0}\ (i = 1,\dots,m).minimize j=1∑n​(dj​+λdj′​)xj​subject toxj​≥0 (j=1,…,n),j=1∑n​aij​xj​=ai0​ (i=1,…,m).

Write A=(aij)A = (a_{ij})A=(aij​), an m×nm\times nm×n real matrix with columns A1,…,AnA_1,\dots,A_nA1​,…,An​, and b=(ai0)b = (a_{i0})b=(ai0​). A basis is a list of mmm linearly independent columns AB(1),…,AB(m)A_{B(1)},\dots,A_{B(m)}AB(1)​,…,AB(m)​; its basic solution xxx has xj=0x_j = 0xj​=0 off the basis and Ax=bAx = bAx=b, and it is a basic feasible solution when also x≥0x \ge 0x≥0. Every column has coordinates yijy_{ij}yij​ in the basis, Aj=∑iyijAB(i)A_j = \sum_i y_{ij}A_{B(i)}Aj​=∑i​yij​AB(i)​. For a cost vector ccc the simplex method uses zj=∑iyijcB(i)z_j = \sum_i y_{ij}c_{B(i)}zj​=∑i​yij​cB(i)​; for the cost c=d+λd′c = d + \lambda d'c=d+λd′ the number zj−cjz_j - c_jzj​−cj​ is affine in λ\lambdaλ:

zj−cj=αj+λβj.z_j - c_j = \alpha_j + \lambda\beta_j .zj​−cj​=αj​+λβj​.

The basis is optimal at λ\lambdaλ when αj+λβj≤0\alpha_j + \lambda\beta_j \le 0αj​+λβj​≤0 for all jjj (inequalities (3)). The critical values of the basis are

λ‾=max⁡βj<0(−αjβj) (−∞ if all βj≥0),λˉ=min⁡βj>0(−αjβj) (+∞ if all βj≤0).\underline\lambda = \max_{\beta_j<0}\Big(-\frac{\alpha_j}{\beta_j}\Big)\ (-\infty \text{ if all }\beta_j\ge 0),\qquad \bar\lambda = \min_{\beta_j>0}\Big(-\frac{\alpha_j}{\beta_j}\Big)\ (+\infty \text{ if all }\beta_j\le 0).λ​=βj​<0max​(−βj​αj​​) (−∞ if all βj​≥0),λˉ=βj​>0min​(−βj​αj​​) (+∞ if all βj​≤0).

The paper assumes throughout that the problem is nondegenerate: no basic feasible solution has more than n−mn - mn−m zero components.

Case A is the situation where the current basis is optimal for some λ\lambdaλ, so that (3) is consistent. If λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ is finite, attained at an index sss with βs>0\beta_s > 0βs​>0, and some yis>0y_{is} > 0yis​>0, the method brings AsA_sAs​ into the basis and removes the column ArA_rAr​, r=B(ℓ)r = B(\ell)r=B(ℓ), chosen by the simplex ratio test; yrs>0y_{rs} > 0yrs​>0. Call the new basis B′B'B′ and its basic feasible solution x′x'x′.

Formalization targets

Goal: the THEOREM (p. 41)

λˉ=min⁡{λ∈R:x′ minimizes (d+λd′)⊤x over Ax=b, x≥0}.\bar\lambda = \min\big\{\lambda\in\mathbb R : x' \text{ minimizes } (d+\lambda d')^{\top}x \text{ over } Ax = b,\ x \ge 0\big\}.λˉ=min{λ∈R:x′ minimizes (d+λd′)⊤x over Ax=b, x≥0}.

This contains both sentences of the paper's THEOREM: the new basis yields a minimum for at least one λ\lambdaλ (namely λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ), and the left end λ‾′\underline\lambda'λ​′ of its interval of optimality equals λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ. The statement uses "least element" and so does not presuppose that the set is an interval.

Milestones

  1. (3): under nondegeneracy, a basic feasible solution is a minimum at λ\lambdaλ if and only if αj+λβj≤0\alpha_j + \lambda\beta_j \le 0αj​+λβj​≤0 for all jjj.
  2. (4)–(5): if (3) is consistent, it holds exactly for λ‾≤λ≤λˉ\underline\lambda \le \lambda \le \bar\lambdaλ​≤λ≤λˉ.
  3. The reduced-cost optimality criterion and its nondegenerate converse, and feasibility of the basis after a simplex pivot (both already proved on the platform).
  4. [1]: λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ satisfies the inequalities (3') αj′+λβj′≤0\alpha'_j + \lambda\beta'_j \le 0αj′​+λβj′​≤0 of the new basis.
  5. (7): αr′=−αs/yrs\alpha'_r = -\alpha_s/y_{rs}αr′​=−αs​/yrs​ and βr′=−βs/yrs\beta'_r = -\beta_s/y_{rs}βr′​=−βs​/yrs​.
  6. (7)–(8): no λ<λˉ\lambda < \bar\lambdaλ<λˉ satisfies (3').
  7. Case A stop: in the nondegenerate Case A setup, if every yis≤0y_{is} \le 0yis​≤0, there is no minimum for any λ>λˉ\lambda > \bar\lambdaλ>λˉ.
  8. Summary (4): under the section's standing assumptions, the set of λ\lambdaλ for which a minimum exists is closed and connected.

Significance

The THEOREM is what makes the parametric procedure correct. The optimality intervals of successive bases meet end to end: the basis entered at λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ takes over exactly where the old one stops, with no gap and no overlap. Together with the stopping rule this gives the paper's summary: starting from one optimal basis, the procedure produces a finite list of bases and characteristic values covering every λ\lambdaλ for which the problem has a minimum, and that set is a closed interval. The same structure underlies the piecewise linear, concave optimal value as a function of λ\lambdaλ, the parametric right-hand-side method by duality, and the shadow-vertex simplex method.

The result is classical and its proof is short, but as printed it contains a sign slip: display (8) on p. 41 states the inequality in the wrong direction, so the contradiction the authors claim does not follow from what they wrote. The formal development states the corrected argument. To our knowledge none of these parametric statements has a machine-checked proof; the fixed-cost facts they rest on (the reduced-cost optimality criterion, Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis Theorem 3.1, and the feasibility of the pivoted basis, Theorem 3.2) are already proved on the platform in Shuze Chen's LinearOptimization library and are reused here as reference items.

Difficulty

The natural first idea is to observe that λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ satisfies (3') and conclude. This proves only that the new basis is optimal at λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ. The statement that nothing below λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ works is a statement about optimality, not about the inequalities (3'): one must know that failure of (3') at λ\lambdaλ means that x′x'x′ is not optimal at λ\lambdaλ. That converse of the optimality test is false for a degenerate basic solution, which can be optimal while some zj−cjz_j - c_jzj​−cj​ is positive. The nondegeneracy assumption is therefore essential, and it must be transported to the new basic solution. The other ingredient is the pivot update of zj−cjz_j - c_jzj​−cj​ when one column leaves and another enters, which the paper uses through (7) without writing it down.

Formalization scope

The problem data are A : Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ, b : Fin m → ℝ and cost vectors d d' : Fin n → ℝ; the parameter λ\lambdaλ is the Lean variable t (λ is a Lean keyword). Indices are 0-based. Feasible set, optimality, bases, reduced costs, basic directions, the coordinates yijy_{ij}yij​ (pivotColumn) and basic feasible solutions (IsSimplexState) are the published LinearOptimization definitions. The commitments and readings of the paper's phrases are:

  • Sign. The platform's reduced cost is cˉj=cj−cB′B−1Aj=−(zj−cj)\bar c_j = c_j - c_B'B^{-1}A_j = -(z_j - c_j)cˉj​=cj​−cB′​B−1Aj​=−(zj​−cj​); αj\alpha_jαj​ and βj\beta_jβj​ are defined as the negatives of the reduced costs for ddd and d′d'd′, and (3), (3'), (5), (7) are stated in the paper's sign.
  • "Yields a minimum" means that the point is feasible and its cost is at most that of every feasible point (IsLpOptimal), never a comparison of values.
  • λˉ\bar\lambdaλˉ is finite in the THEOREM; it is the real number −αs/βs-\alpha_s/\beta_s−αs​/βs​ for an index sss with βs>0\beta_s > 0βs​>0 attaining the minimum. As a function, (5) is valued in WithTop ℝ and WithBot ℝ; no real infimum of a possibly empty set is used.
  • Nondegeneracy is stated for every basic feasible solution, including in the Case A stopping rule and Summary (4). The stopping rule also carries Case A consistency, and Summary (4) carries the section's available basic feasible solution. Linear independence of the rows of AAA is assumed where the platform's criteria need it; it follows from the existence of a basis.
  • "By the simplex method" is the reduced-cost optimality criterion; "the simplex prescription" is the ratio test; "no minimum" in the stopping rule is the unbounded outcome, optimal value −∞-\infty−∞, with the absence of a minimizer stated explicitly.
  • The paper's interval δ≤λ≤ϕ\delta \le \lambda \le \phiδ≤λ≤ϕ of interest plays no role in the THEOREM and is dropped.

The goal is not satisfied by a degenerate reading: its set is defined by optimality, not by the inequalities (3'), and its hypotheses hold on an explicit instance, so the statement is neither the definition of the critical value restated nor vacuous.

Not formalized: Case B (the search for a first λ\lambdaλ with a minimum), Summary (1)–(2) on the whole procedure, the no-repetition remark, the computing experience (§3) and the worked example (§4). Contributions welcome include the pivot-update formula for reduced costs, which is reusable for any simplex-based argument, and the closedness of the set of cost vectors with a finite optimum.

Selected references

  • S. Gass and T. Saaty, The computational algorithm for the parametric objective function, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 2 (1955), 39–45. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800020106
  • T. Saaty and S. Gass, The parametric objective function, Journal of the Operations Research Society of America 2 (1954), 316–319. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2.3.316
  • G. B. Dantzig, Maximization of a linear function of variables subject to linear inequalities, in T. C. Koopmans (ed.), Activity Analysis of Production and Allocation, Wiley, 1951, Ch. XXI (Cowles Commission Monograph No. 13).
  • D. Bertsimas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Introduction to Linear Optimization, Athena Scientific, 1997, §3.1–3.2 and §5.2.
17 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamic ProgrammingLinear OptimizationMarkov Chain+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Linear Programming and Finite Markovian Control Problems V: Average Reward — an Extreme Optimal Solution of the Multichain Linear Program Yields a Pure Stationary Average Optimal PolicyTextbook

Motivation

A Markov decision problem with the average reward criterion asks for a policy that maximises the long-run reward per period of a controlled finite Markov chain. It is the standard model for repeated operational decisions with no natural horizon: inventory replenishment, machine maintenance, queue admission and routing. For finitely many states and actions, Howard (1960) and Blackwell (1962) showed that a pure stationary average optimal policy exists, and policy iteration finds one.

Linear programming formulations are older for the discounted problem (d'Epenoux, 1960) and for chains with a single recurrent class (Manne, 1960). Without a structural assumption, a stationary policy can split the state space into several recurrent classes, the multichain case, and the gain becomes a vector rather than a number. Denardo and Fox (1968) gave a linear programming approach for this case. Hordijk and Kallenberg (1979) showed that a single pair of dual linear programs suffices: an optimal policy can be read off an extreme optimal solution of the dual program. Kallenberg's tract (1983, Chapter 4) is the systematic account of this theory, and this mission formalizes its §4.2–4.4.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite set of states. Each state iii has a nonempty finite set A(i)A(i)A(i) of actions, a reward ria∈Rr_{ia}\in\mathbb Rria​∈R for each action, and transition probabilities piaj≥0p_{iaj}\ge 0piaj​≥0 with ∑jpiaj=1\sum_j p_{iaj}=1∑j​piaj​=1. A policy RRR chooses, at each epoch t=1,2,…t=1,2,\dotst=1,2,…, a probability distribution on A(Xt)A(X_t)A(Xt​) that may depend on the whole history. A stationary policy π∞\pi^\inftyπ∞ uses fixed weights πia\pi_{ia}πia​ at every epoch. A pure stationary policy f∞f^\inftyf∞ always plays f(i)∈A(i)f(i)\in A(i)f(i)∈A(i). Write P(π)ij=∑apiajπiaP(\pi)_{ij}=\sum_a p_{iaj}\pi_{ia}P(π)ij​=∑a​piaj​πia​, r(π)i=∑ariaπiar(\pi)_i=\sum_a r_{ia}\pi_{ia}r(π)i​=∑a​ria​πia​, and P(f)P(f)P(f), r(f)r(f)r(f) in the pure case.

The average reward of RRR from state iii is

ϕi(R)=lim inf⁡T→∞1T∑t=1T∑j∑aPR(Xt=j, Yt=a∣X1=i) rja,\phi_i(R)=\liminf_{T\to\infty}\frac1T\sum_{t=1}^T\sum_j\sum_a\mathbb P_R(X_t=j,\ Y_t=a\mid X_1=i)\,r_{ja},ϕi​(R)=T→∞liminf​T1​t=1∑T​j∑​a∑​PR​(Xt​=j, Yt​=a∣X1​=i)rja​,

and ϕ^i(R)\hat\phi_i(R)ϕ^​i​(R) is the same expression with lim sup⁡\limsuplimsup. The AMD-value-vector is ϕi=sup⁡Rϕi(R)\phi_i=\sup_R\phi_i(R)ϕi​=supR​ϕi​(R), where RRR ranges over all policies, and R∗R^*R∗ is average optimal if ϕ(R∗)=ϕ\phi(R^*)=\phiϕ(R∗)=ϕ. A policy is Blackwell optimal if it maximises the discounted reward vα(R)=∑t≥1αt−1ER[rXtYt]v^\alpha(R)=\sum_{t\ge1}\alpha^{t-1}\mathbb E_R[r_{X_tY_t}]vα(R)=∑t≥1​αt−1ER​[rXt​Yt​​] for all discount factors α\alphaα in some interval [α0,1)[\alpha_0,1)[α0​,1).

For a stochastic matrix PPP, the stationary matrix P∗P^*P∗ is the Cesàro limit of PnP^nPn, and the deviation matrix is D=(I−P+P∗)−1−P∗D=(I-P+P^*)^{-1}-P^*D=(I−P+P∗)−1−P∗. For a pure policy, ϕ(f∞)=P∗(f)r(f)\phi(f^\infty)=P^*(f)r(f)ϕ(f∞)=P∗(f)r(f) and u(f∞)=D(f)r(f)u(f^\infty)=D(f)r(f)u(f∞)=D(f)r(f).

A vector ϕ~\tilde\phiϕ~​ is AMD-superharmonic if some u~\tilde uu~ satisfies ϕ~i≥∑jpiajϕ~j\tilde\phi_i\ge\sum_jp_{iaj}\tilde\phi_jϕ~​i​≥∑j​piaj​ϕ~​j​ and ϕ~i+u~i≥ria+∑jpiaju~j\tilde\phi_i+\tilde u_i\ge r_{ia}+\sum_jp_{iaj}\tilde u_jϕ~​i​+u~i​≥ria​+∑j​piaj​u~j​ for all a∈A(i)a\in A(i)a∈A(i), i∈Ei\in Ei∈E. For weights βj>0\beta_j>0βj​>0 with ∑jβj=1\sum_j\beta_j=1∑j​βj​=1, the primal program (4.2.10) minimises ∑jβjϕ~j\sum_j\beta_j\tilde\phi_j∑j​βj​ϕ~​j​ over such pairs. Its dual is

max⁡{∑i,ariaxia ∣ ∑i,a(δij−piaj)xia=0,  ∑axja+∑i,a(δij−piaj)yia=βj  (j∈E),  x,y≥0}.(4.2.11)\max\Big\{\sum_{i,a}r_{ia}x_{ia}\ \Big|\ \sum_{i,a}(\delta_{ij}-p_{iaj})x_{ia}=0,\ \ \sum_ax_{ja}+\sum_{i,a}(\delta_{ij}-p_{iaj})y_{ia}=\beta_j\ \ (j\in E),\ \ x,y\ge0\Big\}.\tag{4.2.11}max{i,a∑​ria​xia​ ​ i,a∑​(δij​−piaj​)xia​=0,  a∑​xja​+i,a∑​(δij​−piaj​)yia​=βj​  (j∈E),  x,y≥0}.(4.2.11)

Write Ex={i∣∑axia>0}E_x=\{i\mid\sum_ax_{ia}>0\}Ex​={i∣∑a​xia​>0}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2.4

If (x∗,y∗)(x^*,y^*)(x∗,y∗) is an optimal solution of (4.2.11) and an extreme point of its feasible set, then a decision rule f∗f_*f∗​ with

xif∗(i)∗>0  (i∈Ex∗),yif∗(i)∗>0  (i∈E∖Ex∗)x^*_{if_*(i)}>0\ \ (i\in E_{x^*}),\qquad y^*_{if_*(i)}>0\ \ (i\in E\setminus E_{x^*})xif∗​(i)∗​>0  (i∈Ex∗​),yif∗​(i)∗​>0  (i∈E∖Ex∗​)

exists, and every such f∗∞f_*^\inftyf∗∞​ is average optimal.

The goal is stated for every finite model, with no assumption on the chain structure, and for every rule-conforming f∗f_*f∗​.

Milestones

  1. Optimality equations (Theorem 4.2.1): a Blackwell optimal pure policy gives (ϕ∘,u∘)(\phi^\circ,u^\circ)(ϕ∘,u∘) with ϕi∘=max⁡a∈A(i)∑jpiajϕj∘\phi^\circ_i=\max_{a\in A(i)}\sum_jp_{iaj}\phi^\circ_jϕi∘​=maxa∈A(i)​∑j​piaj​ϕj∘​ and ϕi∘+ui∘=max⁡a∈Aˉ(i){ria+∑jpiajuj∘}\phi^\circ_i+u^\circ_i=\max_{a\in\bar A(i)}\{r_{ia}+\sum_jp_{iaj}u^\circ_j\}ϕi∘​+ui∘​=maxa∈Aˉ(i)​{ria​+∑j​piaj​uj∘​}.
  2. Superharmonic characterisation (Theorem 4.2.2): ϕ\phiϕ is the smallest AMD-superharmonic vector.
  3. Lim sup optimality (Theorem 4.2.3): a pure stationary average optimal f∞f^\inftyf∞ satisfies ϕ^(f∞)≥ϕ^(R)\hat\phi(f^\infty)\ge\hat\phi(R)ϕ^​(f∞)≥ϕ^​(R) for every RRR.
  4. The three propositions inside the proof of Theorem 4.2.4: complementary slackness along f∗f_*f∗​ (4.2.1), closedness of Ex∗E_{x^*}Ex∗​ under P(f∗)P(f_*)P(f∗​) (4.2.2), and transience of E∖Ex∗E\setminus E_{x^*}E∖Ex∗​ under P(f∗)P(f_*)P(f∗​) (4.2.3).
  5. The policy–solution correspondence (§4.3): the representative (x(π),y(π))(x(\pi),y(\pi))(x(π),y(π)) is feasible (Theorem 4.3.1); the map is one-to-one with inverse (4.3.1) (Theorem 4.3.2); ExE_xEx​ is closed under, and is exactly the recurrent set of, P(π(x,y))P(\pi(x,y))P(π(x,y)) (Propositions 4.3.2–4.3.3); the correspondence preserves optimality (Theorem 4.3.3); pure policies map to extreme points (Theorem 4.3.4).
  6. Policy evaluation (Theorem 4.4.1): the system (I−P(f))ϕ~=0(I-P(f))\tilde\phi=0(I−P(f))ϕ~​=0, ϕ~+(I−P(f))u~=r(f)\tilde\phi+(I-P(f))\tilde u=r(f)ϕ~​+(I−P(f))u~=r(f), u~+(I−P(f))z~=0\tilde u+(I-P(f))\tilde z=0u~+(I−P(f))z~=0 is solvable, and every solution has ϕ~=ϕ(f∞)\tilde\phi=\phi(f^\infty)ϕ~​=ϕ(f∞) and u~=u(f∞)\tilde u=u(f^\infty)u~=u(f∞).

Significance

Theorem 4.2.4 reduces the multichain average reward problem to one linear program. Combined with Theorems 4.3.3 and 4.3.4, every pure stationary average optimal policy arises from some extreme optimal solution, so enumerating extreme optimal solutions enumerates all of them (Remark 4.2.5). The same program is the starting point for the constrained average reward problems of §4.7, where a policy must also satisfy linear constraints on its state–action frequencies. Theorem 4.4.1 is the evaluation step of multichain policy iteration.

The results are proved in the tract and, earlier, in Hordijk and Kallenberg (1979). None of them is formalized in a proof assistant. The platform has machine-checked average reward results only for unichain models, where the gain is a scalar. This mission adds the multichain theory, with general history-dependent randomized policies as competitors, and also yields reusable statements about stationary and deviation matrices of finite chains.

Difficulty

Under a unichain assumption, the dual variables xxx form a stationary distribution and the yyy-variables are unnecessary, so the obvious argument reads a policy off xxx alone. In the multichain case the xxx-part of an optimal solution can vanish on whole sets of states, and on those states the policy must be read off yyy. The argument then has to show that these states are transient under the selected policy, which is where extremality is essential. For a non-extreme optimal solution the book passes instead to the randomized policy (4.3.1), which needs the separate argument of Theorem 4.3.3. A second obstacle is that optimality is against all history-dependent randomized policies, so the comparison of ϕ(f∗∞)\phi(f_*^\infty)ϕ(f∗∞​) with ϕ\phiϕ must pass through the superharmonic characterisation (Theorem 4.2.2), whose proof uses the existence of a Blackwell optimal policy.

Formalization scope

The model is the published MarkovDecisionProcesses.StationaryMDP: finite state and action types, a nonempty Finset of admissible actions per state, and stochastic rows. General policies are the published AvgHRPolicy (decision rules depending on the epoch and the full history). The criteria are the published gainInf, gainSup and optGainInf; all values are real. Average optimality is the book's lim inf notion, ϕi(R∗)=sup⁡Rϕi(R)\phi_i(R^*)=\sup_R\phi_i(R)ϕi​(R∗)=supR​ϕi​(R) for every iii. It is not Puterman's stronger IsAverageOptimal. The stationary and deviation matrices are the published Cesàro limitMatrix and deviationMatrix. Their existence and invertibility (Theorem 2.4.1) are never assumed as hypotheses. LP variables are indexed by admissible state–action pairs, so Set.extremePoints is the book's notion of extreme feasible solution. Recurrence is the classical finite-chain notion: every state accessible from iii leads back to iii. The ergodic set of a recurrent state is the set of states accessible from it.

A formalization that assumes a unichain or ergodic model trivializes the mission (it reduces Theorem 4.2.4 to known unichain results). No statement here makes such an assumption, and the weights βj\beta_jβj​ are strictly positive and sum to one, as in (4.2.10).

The proofs need finite Markov chain theory: the Cesàro limit, P∗P=PP∗=P∗P^*P=PP^*=P^*P∗P=PP∗=P∗, P∗D=0P^*D=0P∗D=0, transience versus P⋅j∗=0P^*_{\cdot j}=0P⋅j∗​=0, and positivity of the stationary distribution on ergodic sets. They also need LP duality with complementary slackness and the existence of a Blackwell optimal pure policy. The last result is posed separately on the platform (Blackwell 1962, Theorem 5). LP duality is available as proved platform theorems (LinearOptimization.*), whose sign conventions must be matched. Contributions on the Markov chain layer are reusable across the whole series.

Selected references

  • L. C. M. Kallenberg, Linear Programming and Finite Markovian Control Problems, Mathematical Centre Tracts 148, Mathematisch Centrum, Amsterdam, 1983. https://ir.cwi.nl/pub/13008
  • A. Hordijk and L. C. M. Kallenberg, Linear programming and Markov decision chains, Management Science 25(4):352–362, 1979. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.25.4.352
  • D. Blackwell, Discrete dynamic programming, Annals of Mathematical Statistics 33(2):719–726, 1962. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177704593
  • E. V. Denardo and B. L. Fox, Multichain Markov renewal programs, SIAM Journal on Applied Mathematics 16(3):468–487, 1968.
  • J. G. Kemeny and J. L. Snell, Finite Markov Chains, Van Nostrand, 1960.
17 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Information TheoryProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

I-Divergence Geometry of Probability Distributions and Minimization Problems 1: Cyclic I-Projections onto Linear Sets of a Finite Space Converge to the I-Projection onto Their IntersectionResearch Paper

Motivation

Fitting a probability distribution to prescribed margins or moments is a basic task in statistics and information theory. Starting from a reference distribution, one can enforce one constraint at a time by choosing the closest distribution in I-divergence, then cycle through the constraints. In a contingency table this procedure is iterative proportional fitting. A single projection onto the intersection is the desired answer, but each step of the iteration sees only one constraint set. Csiszár's 1975 paper proves that cyclic I-projections converge to the joint I-projection when the underlying set is finite and the constraint sets are linear. This mission formalizes that result together with the geometric statements needed to identify its limit.

Setting

Let (X,X)(X,\mathcal X)(X,X) be a measurable space. A probability distribution (PD) is a probability measure on it. For PDs PPP and QQQ, the I-divergence I(P∥Q)I(P\|Q)I(P∥Q) is the Kullback–Leibler divergence: integrate the logarithm of the density of PPP relative to QQQ against PPP, with value +∞+\infty+∞ when PPP is not absolutely continuous with respect to QQQ or the integral diverges. It takes values in [0,+∞][0,+\infty][0,+∞] and vanishes exactly when P=QP=QP=Q. The logarithmic conventions are log⁡0=−∞\log0=-\inftylog0=−∞ and 0⋅(±∞)=00\cdot(\pm\infty)=00⋅(±∞)=0 (Csiszár 1975, (1.1)–(1.3)).

Given a PD RRR and a set E\mathcal EE of PDs that contains at least one PPP with finite I(P∥R)I(P\|R)I(P∥R), an I-projection QQQ of RRR onto E\mathcal EE minimizes I(P∥R)I(P\|R)I(P∥R) over P∈EP\in\mathcal EP∈E and itself has finite divergence. The variation distance is the L1L^1L1 distance between the densities of two PDs relative to a common dominating measure. A set of PDs is linear here when every real affine combination of two members that is still a PD also belongs to the set. This includes distributions satisfying fixed linear moment constraints (Csiszár 1975, pp. 147 and 150–151).

For the goal, XXX is finite. Choose k≥1k\ge1k≥1 linear sets E1,…,Ek\mathcal E_1,\ldots,\mathcal E_kE1​,…,Ek​, and write E=⋂i=1kEi\mathcal E=\bigcap_{i=1}^k\mathcal E_iE=⋂i=1k​Ei​. Beginning with Q0=RQ_0=RQ0​=R, let QnQ_nQn​ be the I-projection of Qn−1Q_{n-1}Qn−1​ onto Ei\mathcal E_iEi​ when n=mk+in=mk+in=mk+i and 1≤i≤k1\le i\le k1≤i≤k. The common feasible set is assumed nonempty and contains a PD absolutely continuous with respect to RRR. These assumptions ensure that the intended finite-divergence projection problem is present (Csiszár 1975, Theorem 3.2).

Formalization targets

The goal is the convergence statement of Theorem 3.2:

∀x∈X,Qn({x})⟶Q({x}),Q=proj⁡EI(R).\forall x\in X,\qquad Q_n(\{x\})\longrightarrow Q(\{x\}), \quad Q=\operatorname{proj}^{I}_{\mathcal E}(R).∀x∈X,Qn​({x})⟶Q({x}),Q=projEI​(R).

The goal also asserts existence of the cyclic sequence. On finite XXX, convergence of every point mass is equivalent to convergence in variation distance. The target fixes no rate. Its milestones include existence on variation-closed convex sets (Theorem 2.1), the identity (2.6) and the tangent-hyperplane Lemma 2.1, the Pythagorean characterization and transitivity of I-projections (Theorems 2.2–2.3), the density form under general linear constraints (Theorem 3.1) and the finite-moment exponential-density characterization (Corollary 3.1(A)), and the finite-space identity used in Theorem 3.2's proof. The two displayed identities in that proof are also targets:

I(Q∥R)=I(Q∥Qn)+∑i=1nI(Qi∥Qi−1),I(P∥Qn)=I(P∥Q)+I(Q∥Qn)(P∈E).I(Q\|R)=I(Q\|Q_n)+\sum_{i=1}^{n}I(Q_i\|Q_{i-1}),\qquad I(P\|Q_n)=I(P\|Q)+I(Q\|Q_n)\quad(P\in\mathcal E).I(Q∥R)=I(Q∥Qn​)+i=1∑n​I(Qi​∥Qi−1​),I(P∥Qn​)=I(P∥Q)+I(Q∥Qn​)(P∈E).

They specify the divergence relationships that the eventual convergence theorem must preserve (Csiszár 1975, (3.14)–(3.15)).

Significance

The theorem justifies enforcing finitely many linear distribution constraints one at a time while still obtaining the same I-projection as a simultaneous minimization. It gives a precise limit for the iterative proportional fitting procedure discussed by Csiszár, including cases in which the initial distribution has zero probabilities; strict positivity of RRR is not required (Csiszár 1975, p. 155). The accompanying identities make the relation between a partial iterate and the final solution explicit. The result was proved in 1975. The work here is to provide machine-checked proofs of that known result and its supporting geometry, while keeping the source's extended-value and boundary conventions visible.

Difficulty

Successive projections minimize divergence over different sets. Minimization for one set by itself does not identify the minimizer over their intersection, and ordinary metric projection facts do not directly apply because I-divergence is asymmetric and can be infinite. The paper's statements need to handle zero densities and feasible distributions at infinite divergence without turning extended-real expressions into default values. On the finite space, convergence of a subsequence is available, but the formal claim must still identify every possible limit as the joint I-projection. These are the mathematical and representation difficulties faced by a complete proof (Csiszár 1975, §§2–3).

Formalization scope

Lean uses Measure X and Mathlib's InformationTheory.klDiv : ℝ≥0∞ for I(P∥Q)I(P\|Q)I(P∥Q). A projection is a finite-divergence minimizer over the stated feasible set; no real-valued infimum or implicit arbitrary witness replaces it. Variation distance uses the densities relative to P+QP+QP+Q, which dominates both PDs and gives the value of (1.6). Variation closure is expressed by sequential convergence in this distance. The integral ∫log⁡qR dP\int\log q_R\,dP∫logqR​dP is represented in extended reals using positive and negative logarithmic parts and ENNReal.log; the theorem hypotheses keep the indeterminate +∞−(+∞)+\infty-(+\infty)+∞−(+∞) case out. Density equations are RRR-almost everywhere, and a claim that QQQ has an RRR-density explicitly includes Q≪RQ\ll RQ≪R.

For moment constraints, every integral is accompanied by integrability. Real affine combinations are tested through their values on measurable sets; the candidate combination must be a PD. The goal assumes a finite carrier with measurable singleton sets and k≥1k\ge1k≥1. Lean indexes the sets by Fin k from zero, so Qs (n+1) is projected onto the set at n % k; this is the paper's rule (3.13) shifted by one. The goal asserts existence of a recursive sequence before speaking about every such sequence, and the required feasible witness has P≪RP\ll RP≪R. These choices rule out an empty cyclic schedule, junk integrals, and a vacuous convergence assertion. Reusable contributions include the variation-distance and I-projection interfaces, their Pythagorean geometry, and the finite-moment density characterization; the mission's main closure remains Theorem 3.2.

Selected references

  • I. Csiszár, I-Divergence Geometry of Probability Distributions and Minimization Problems, The Annals of Probability 3(1), 146–158 (1975). DOI: 10.1214/aop/1176996454.
14 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Scheduling of Vehicles from a Central Depot to a Number of Delivery Points: The Savings Procedure Always Ends in a Feasible Truck Allocation Whose Mileage Is the Initial Less the Linked SavingsResearch Paper

Motivation

Delivering goods from one depot to many customers with a fleet of trucks is the vehicle routing problem. Dantzig and Ramser formulated it in 1959 as the "truck dispatching problem" (Management Sci. 6 (1959), doi:10.1287/mnsc.6.1.80). Five years later Clarke and Wright proposed the savings procedure (Oper. Res. 12 (1964), 568–581, doi:10.1287/opre.12.4.568): start with one truck per customer and repeatedly join two routes where joining saves the most distance, as long as the trucks can still carry the loads. On the twelve-customer example of Dantzig and Ramser it reached 290 units against their 294.

The savings procedure became the standard construction heuristic for vehicle routing. It appears in every textbook treatment of the problem, is the initial solution of many metaheuristics, and is the benchmark against which later construction methods are compared. The paper states the procedure and its bookkeeping (the half matrix, the vector QQQ, Table II) but proves nothing about it. That every run of the procedure ends, and ends in a feasible allocation, is left to the reader.

Setting

A depot P0P_0P0​ serves customers P1,…,PMP_1,\dots,P_MP1​,…,PM​. The distance dy,zd_{y,z}dy,z​ between every two points is given, and customer PjP_jPj​ requires a load qjq_jqj​. Trucks come in nnn capacity classes: xix_ixi​ trucks of capacity CiC_iCi​ are available, with C1<⋯<CnC_1<\dots<C_nC1​<⋯<Cn​, and the trucks of the smallest capacity are unlimited, x1=∞x_1=\inftyx1​=∞ (p. 569).

A run is the ordered list of customers Pa1,…,PakP_{a_1},\dots,P_{a_k}Pa1​​,…,Pak​​ served by one truck, which drives P0Pa1⋯PakP0P_0P_{a_1}\cdots P_{a_k}P_0P0​Pa1​​⋯Pak​​P0​. Its load is ∑iqai\sum_i q_{a_i}∑i​qai​​. A state of the procedure is a list of runs; its mileage is the total length of its runs. A list of runs is an allocation if every customer lies on exactly one run, and it is feasible if each run can be given a truck of capacity at least its load without using more trucks of any class than are available.

The saving of the cell (y:z)(y:z)(y:z) is d0,y+d0,z−dy,zd_{0,y}+d_{0,z}-d_{y,z}d0,y​+d0,z​−dy,z​. The half matrix records ty,z=1t_{y,z}=1ty,z​=1 if PyP_yPy​ and PzP_zPz​ are adjacent on a run, and ty,0∈{0,1,2}t_{y,0}\in\{0,1,2\}ty,0​∈{0,1,2} counts how many ends of runs lie at PyP_yPy​. Table II counts, for each capacity level CiC_iCi​, the runs with load above CiC_iCi​ and the trucks with capacity above CiC_iCi​.

The procedure starts with the runs [P1],…,[PM][P_1],\dots,[P_M][P1​],…,[PM​], so ty,0=2t_{y,0}=2ty,0​=2 for every customer. A cell (y:z)(y:z)(y:z) is admissible if (I) ty,0>0t_{y,0}>0ty,0​>0 and tz,0>0t_{z,0}>0tz,0​>0; (II) PyP_yPy​ and PzP_zPz​ are on different runs; (III) after replacing those two runs by one run of load Qy+QzQ_y+Q_zQy​+Qz​, no column of Table II has more runs than trucks. A step links an admissible cell of maximum saving, ties broken arbitrarily, by joining the two runs end to end at PyP_yPy​ and PzP_zPz​. The procedure stops when no cell is admissible.

Formalization targets

Goal: correctness of the procedure

Assume symmetric distances, C1<⋯<CnC_1<\dots<C_nC1​<⋯<Cn​, x1=∞x_1=\inftyx1​=∞, and that the initial one-truck-per-customer allocation passes the Table II test. Then every run of the procedure is finite whatever the tie-breaks; at every reachable state from which a link is possible a step exists; and every final state SSS is a feasible allocation satisfying relation (A), ∑z≠yty,z=2\sum_{z\ne y}t_{y,z}=2∑z=y​ty,z​=2 for every customer, with

mileage(S)=2∑j=1Md0,j−∑1≤y<z≤Mty,z=1(d0,y+d0,z−dy,z).\text{mileage}(S)=2\sum_{j=1}^M d_{0,j}-\sum_{\substack{1\le y<z\le M\\ t_{y,z}=1}}\bigl(d_{0,y}+d_{0,z}-d_{y,z}\bigr).mileage(S)=2j=1∑M​d0,j​−1≤y<z≤Mty,z​=1​∑​(d0,y​+d0,z​−dy,z​).

Milestones

mileage(link(S,y,z))=mileage(S)−(d0,y+d0,z−dy,z)for admissible (y:z),\text{mileage}(\text{link}(S,y,z))=\text{mileage}(S)-(d_{0,y}+d_{0,z}-d_{y,z})\quad\text{for admissible }(y:z),mileage(link(S,y,z))=mileage(S)−(d0,y​+d0,z​−dy,z​)for admissible (y:z),

relation (A) at every reachable state, the permanence of links between customers, and

#{runs with load>Ci}≤∑k>ixk  (i=1,…,n)  ⟺  the runs can be allocated to trucks,\#\{\text{runs with load}>C_i\}\le\sum_{k>i}x_k\ \ (i=1,\dots,n)\iff\text{the runs can be allocated to trucks},#{runs with load>Ci​}≤k>i∑​xk​  (i=1,…,n)⟺the runs can be allocated to trucks,

which together give feasibility of every reachable state. Two further milestones: when Cn≥∑jqjC_n\ge\sum_j q_jCn​≥∑j​qj​ and the distances are a metric, the optimum equals the traveling salesman optimum (p. 569); and on the data of Table I every run of the procedure ends with total distance 290.

Significance

The goal is the specification the paper's procedure meets: it always terminates, never gets stuck, and outputs routes the fleet can actually drive, with the mileage the half-matrix bookkeeping predicts. The equivalence of the Table II test with truck feasibility is the reason the procedure can check capacities by counting columns instead of solving an assignment problem; it is a nested-class instance of Hall's marriage condition and is reusable for any routing or bin-assignment problem with ordered vehicle classes.

None of these statements is formalized anywhere, and the paper does not prove them. The paper makes no claim of optimality ("near-optimal", p. 568, is not quantified), and the mission does not either. A formal model of the procedure as a nondeterministic transition system is a base on which later results about savings heuristics (worst-case ratios, parallel and sequential variants) can be stated.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for termination, "each link removes a run", needs the invariant that every reachable state is a partition of the customers into runs; the procedure manipulates ordered lists and reverses runs, so the invariant must be carried through every step. Feasibility is not preserved by an arbitrary link but only by one that passes condition (III), and turning the column test into an actual assignment of runs to trucks is a matching argument that fails without both x1=∞x_1=\inftyx1​=∞ and the ordering of the capacities. Because ties are broken arbitrarily, every statement must hold for all runs of a nondeterministic procedure, not for one canonical execution. The worked example requires following every tie-break.

Formalization scope

Points are Fin (M+1) with depot 0, and a run's length is SupplyChainTheory.routeCost from the referenced module SupplyChainTheory_vrp. Capacity class i : Fin (n+1) is the paper's Ci+1C_{i+1}Ci+1​; availabilities are in ℕ∞; loads and capacities are real. A state is a list of runs, each an ordered list of customers; the matrix ttt and the vector QQQ are computed from the state. The procedure is a step relation, and every invariant is stated for reachable states. Termination is Acc of the step relation at the initial state.

Choices committed to:

  • distances are arbitrary real, symmetric numbers (the half matrix, p. 573); no nonnegativity or triangle inequality is assumed in the goal, and savings may be negative;
  • every run: ties are free, as the paper suggests choosing randomly;
  • reachable states: invariants are not claimed for arbitrary lists of runs;
  • Table II is read cumulatively: column "Over CiC_iCi​" compares runs with load >Ci>C_i>Ci​ against all trucks of capacity >Ci>C_i>Ci​, as the printed Tables II, IV and VI show;
  • x1=∞x_1=\inftyx1​=∞ and C1<⋯<CnC_1<\dots<C_nC1​<⋯<Cn​ are hypotheses; qj≤Cnq_j\le C_nqj​≤Cn​ is not separately assumed, since it follows from the initial Table II test;
  • the initial one-truck-per-customer allocation is assumed feasible (p. 572);
  • the metric hypotheses enter only the traveling-salesman milestone.

A correctness claim only about final states, without termination and progress, would hold for a procedure with no moves; a step relation with a fixed tie-break would prove less than the paper; invariants for arbitrary states are false; and a mileage identity for an arbitrary partition says nothing about the procedure's output. None of these is the target.

Not formalized: the informal C1≪∑qjC_1\ll\sum q_jC1​≪∑qj​, the shadow-cost reading of p. 571, the decomposition savings (2)–(5) of the general scheme, the load-splitting reduction of pp. 572–573, the Dantzig–Ramser methods, and the empirical comparisons and appendices.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, in particular the Table II equivalence, which needs a Hall-type argument for nested classes, and a decision procedure for the worked example.

Selected references

  • G. Clarke and J. W. Wright, Scheduling of vehicles from a central depot to a number of delivery points, Operations Research 12(4) (1964), 568–581. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.12.4.568
  • G. B. Dantzig and J. H. Ramser, The truck dispatching problem, Management Science 6(1) (1959), 80–91. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.6.1.80
  • P. Hall, On representatives of subsets, Journal of the London Mathematical Society 10 (1935), 26–30. https://doi.org/10.1112/jlms/s1-10.37.26
12 thms4 active usersReviewed
Complexity TheoryLinear Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Linear Characterizations of Combinatorial Optimization Problems II: A Small Polynomial-Time Generator of Violated Inequalities Puts the Decision Problem in PResearch Paper

Motivation

Many combinatorial optimization problems ask for the largest value of a linear objective over discrete feasible solutions. A linear program over the convex hull of those solutions has the same optimum, so one approach is to describe that hull by inequalities. For matching, for example, inequalities support efficient optimization; for other problems, the full family can be very large. A generator of violated inequalities offers a different interface: given a proposed point, it either certifies hull membership or produces one valid inequality that the point violates. Karp and Papadimitriou asked what the existence of an efficient generator implies for the underlying decision problem. Their answer is Theorem 2 of the technical report.

The report appeared as MIT/LCS/TM-154 in 1980 and later in SIAM Journal on Computing in 1982. Its first theorem addresses a small facial description whose inequality family belongs to NP. This mission concerns its second theorem, where the inequalities may be generated on demand in polynomial time. The conclusion is stronger: the decision language itself belongs to P. The report derives an NP-complete consequence as Corollary 2, conditional on the unresolved equality P = NP. The published article gives the later bibliographic record; all numbering here follows the technical report.

Setting

A combinatorial optimization problem C=(L,n,S)C=(L,n,S)C=(L,n,S) consists of a binary input language LLL, a nonnegative integer dimension n(z)n(z)n(z), and a set S(z)⊆Z+n(z)S(z)\subseteq\mathbb Z_+^{n(z)}S(z)⊆Z+n(z)​ of feasible vectors for each z∈Lz\in Lz∈L. The report requires polynomial-time recognition of LLL, of correctly sized pairs ⟨z,y⟩\langle z,y\rangle⟨z,y⟩, and of feasible pairs ⟨z,x⟩\langle z,x\rangle⟨z,x⟩. An instance adds an integer objective c∈Zn(z)c\in\mathbb Z^{n(z)}c∈Zn(z). Its threshold decision language is

D(C)={⟨z,c,k⟩:z∈L, k∈Z, ∃x∈S(z), c⋅x≥k}.D(C)=\{\langle z,c,k\rangle:z\in L,\ k\in\mathbb Z,\ \exists x\in S(z),\ c\cdot x\ge k\}.D(C)={⟨z,c,k⟩:z∈L, k∈Z, ∃x∈S(z), c⋅x≥k}.

Write CH(S(z))\mathrm{CH}(S(z))CH(S(z)) for the convex hull of the feasible vectors. A generator G(C)G(C)G(C) receives z∈Lz\in Lz∈L and a rational vector p∈Qn(z)p\in\mathbb Q^{n(z)}p∈Qn(z). It returns “O.K.” exactly when ppp belongs to the hull. Otherwise it returns an integer vector fff and integer ggg for which f⋅p>gf\cdot p>gf⋅p>g while f⋅x≤gf\cdot x\le gf⋅x≤g for every x∈S(z)x\in S(z)x∈S(z). The family FG(C)F_G(C)FG​(C) contains every triple ⟨z,f,g⟩\langle z,f,g\rangle⟨z,f,g⟩ that occurs as some output. It is a facial description because its inequalities describe the hull exactly. The generator is small if one polynomial p0p_0p0​ bounds every coefficient in every output by 2p0(∣z∣+n(z))2^{p_0(|z|+n(z))}2p0​(∣z∣+n(z)) in absolute value. Its running time is measured on the full encoded query, including every rational coordinate. These definitions are from §§2 and 4 of the report.

Formalization targets

Theorem 2

The goal is the report's stated implication:

G(C) is a small polynomial-time generator⟹D(C)∈P.G(C)\text{ is a small polynomial-time generator}\quad\Longrightarrow\quad D(C)\in\mathrm P.G(C) is a small polynomial-time generator⟹D(C)∈P.

It allows any c.o.p. satisfying Definition 1, including an empty feasible set or dimension zero. It does not assert P = NP; that consequence needs the additional hypothesis that D(C)D(C)D(C) is NP-complete. The goal is supported by five source claims: the output family is facial; feasibility of system (4) is equivalent to membership in D(C)D(C)D(C); Lemma 4 bounds the distance from a rational point to a small hyperplane; its Corollary extends the bound to a real point on a flat; and Lemma 5 controls distance to a flat after one more hyperplane is added. The system (4) target is

∃x∈Qn(z):c⋅x≥k,f⋅x≤g(⟨z,f,g⟩∈FG(C))⟺⟨z,c,k⟩∈D(C).\exists x\in\mathbb Q^{n(z)}:\quad c\cdot x\ge k,\quad f\cdot x\le g\quad(\langle z,f,g\rangle\in F_G(C))\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad\langle z,c,k\rangle\in D(C).∃x∈Qn(z):c⋅x≥k,f⋅x≤g(⟨z,f,g⟩∈FG​(C))⟺⟨z,c,k⟩∈D(C).

The distance targets use the report's parameter ttt and the bounds 2−(n(z)+1)t2^{-(n(z)+1)t}2−(n(z)+1)t and (2t−1)δ(2^t-1)\delta(2t−1)δ, exactly as printed on pp. 12–13.

Significance

Theorem 2 turns an efficient separation interface into an efficient test for the threshold language. Consequently, if a c.o.p.'s decision language is NP-complete, a small polynomial-time generator would imply P = NP, as the report's Corollary 2 says. This gives a complexity barrier to a whole class of proposed cutting-plane interfaces, independently of how many inequalities the complete description contains. The result concerns the worst-case running time and output coefficient size; it does not rule out useful generators without those guarantees. Karp and Papadimitriou also point out positive applications to problems already known to be in P.

The mathematical theorem was proved in the report. The mission asks for a machine-checked version of that known result, with explicit interfaces for the generator, coefficient bounds, and the underlying complexity class. The local platform catalog already contains Cook's Turing-machine definitions and a reusable binary-integer encoding; it also contains point-to-hyperplane distance results and a Gram-determinant distance result in other settings. Theorem 2 and these particular source claims are new formalization targets here. The distance and encoding interfaces can serve later missions about separation oracles and bit complexity.

Difficulty

Calling the generator once does not by itself decide whether the objective threshold is attainable: the point supplied to it may be outside the hull, and a single returned inequality says only that this point is excluded. Repeatedly asking at an unchanged point may return the same inequality. The report must also control very small separations, coefficient sizes, and finite precision when an iterative linear-feasibility procedure uses the oracle. Lemmas 4 and 5 quantify the geometric gaps and movement that such a procedure needs. Its Lemmas 2, 3, and 6 address the surrounding perturbation, volume, and iteration arguments; Lemma 6 explicitly relies on another analysis for the finite-precision bound. These are substantive proof obligations even though their statements are not all separate milestones in this proposal. See §4 of the report.

Formalization scope

The report's footnote uses RRR for the rationals. Thus ppp, the hull, and system (4) live in Qn(z)\mathbb Q^{n(z)}Qn(z). Euclidean distances are evaluated after casting coordinates into EuclideanSpace R (Fin n)\mathrm{EuclideanSpace}\,\mathbb R\,(\mathrm{Fin}\ n)EuclideanSpaceR(Fin n); a hyperplane distance is the quotient ∣f⋅r−g∣/∥f∥2|f\cdot r-g|/\|f\|_2∣f⋅r−g∣/∥f∥2​, and distance to a flat uses Euclidean infimum distance. The report does not define “affinely independent hyperplanes”; this mission reads it as linear independence of their normals, which ensures a common flat. Small hyperplanes have nonzero normals, avoiding a zero denominator.

The alphabet is {0,1,−,#}\{0,1,-,\#\}{0,1,−,#}. Binary tuple codes contain zzz, an explicit vector dimension, and every integer; a rational coordinate contains its reduced numerator and denominator. The generator's string function must match the mathematical oracle on every valid query and be polynomial time in the complete code length. A malformed string is outside D(C)D(C)D(C). The source's arbitrary polynomial bound is written ma+am^a+ama+a for one exponent aaa fixed before all instances. For the bit-length parameter ttt, the printed logarithms of possibly nonpositive cic_ici​ and kkk are read as ceiling logarithms of absolute values, with clog⁡2(0)=0\operatorname{clog}_2(0)=0clog2​(0)=0 and the printed +1+1+1 terms retained. The source's formula ε=2−(2n(z)+2)t\varepsilon=2^{-(2n(z)+2)t}ε=2−(2n(z)+2)t remains relevant to the eventual proof of Theorem 2, although no ε\varepsilonε system is a separate draft item here.

Every oracle answer must separate the queried point and remain valid on all of S(z)S(z)S(z); these obligations prevent an arbitrary function from satisfying the goal. The c.o.p. structure retains all three polynomial-recognition conditions of Definition 1. The paper's displayed “min” in (3) is inconsistent with its threshold language and surrounding maximization formulas; D(C)D(C)D(C) uses the printed c⋅x≥kc\cdot x\ge kc⋅x≥k. The typed source's “x∉Hx\notin Hx∈/H” in Lemma 4 is read as the already named point r∉Hr\notin Hr∈/H.

Contributions can develop the rational-hull equivalence, the two quantitative hyperplane lemmas, the finite-precision ellipsoid procedure underlying Lemma 6, or the perturbation and volume claims. The complexity substrate is Cook's one-tape model of P and NP, and the binary integer codec is the published ProjSchedTW_Complexity_Encoding definition. The geometry lemmas are phrased so that existing Mathlib Euclidean-space results can be reused without changing the source's rational optimization domain.

Selected references

  • Richard M. Karp and Christos H. Papadimitriou, On Linear Characterizations of Combinatorial Optimization Problems, MIT/LCS/TM-154, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1980. Technical report.
  • Richard M. Karp and Christos H. Papadimitriou, “On Linear Characterizations of Combinatorial Optimization Problems,” SIAM Journal on Computing 11 (1982), 620–632. DOI.
  • Stephen A. Cook, “The Complexity of Theorem-Proving Procedures,” Proceedings of the Third Annual ACM Symposium on Theory of Computing, 1971. DOI.
11 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningReinforcement Learning·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Theory of Policy Gradient Methods: Optimality, Approximation, and Distribution Shift 5: Natural Policy Gradient with Softmax Policies Is Within log|A|/(ηT) + 1/((1−γ)²T) of OptimalResearch Paper

Why natural policy gradient

Policy gradient methods optimize a parameterized policy directly by gradient ascent on its expected discounted return. They underlie most practical reinforcement-learning systems, yet for a long time their convergence was understood only locally: the objective θ↦Vπθ(ρ)\theta\mapsto V^{\pi_\theta}(\rho)θ↦Vπθ​(ρ) is not concave, and plain gradient ascent can stall on plateaus. The natural policy gradient (NPG) of Kakade (2001) preconditions the gradient by the pseudoinverse of the Fisher information matrix of the policy, so that steps are measured in the geometry of the induced action distributions rather than in parameter space. NPG is the conceptual ancestor of trust-region methods such as TRPO and PPO.

Agarwal, Kakade, Lee and Mahajan (arXiv:1908.00261v5, JMLR 2021) prove that exact NPG with softmax policies converges to the optimal value at rate O(1/T)O(1/T)O(1/T), with constants that depend on neither the number of states, nor the number of actions beyond log⁡∣A∣\log|\mathcal A|log∣A∣, nor any distribution mismatch coefficient. This mission formalizes that result, Theorem 5.3 of the paper, and the lemmas its proof rests on.

Timeline. Kakade (2001) introduced NPG and observed that, for softmax policies, it moves toward the greedy policy. Kakade and Langford (2002) proved the performance difference lemma. Even-Dar, Kakade and Mansour (2009) analyzed experts algorithms in changing MDPs, whose regret argument this proof adapts; Geist, Scherrer and Pietquin (2019) studied regularized policy iteration with related rates. Agarwal et al. (preprint 2019, journal 2021) gave the dimension-free log⁡∣A∣/(ηT)+1/((1−γ)2T)\log|\mathcal A|/(\eta T)+1/((1-\gamma)^2T)log∣A∣/(ηT)+1/((1−γ)2T) bound formalized here.

Setting

A finite discounted MDP consists of finite sets S\mathcal SS (states) and A\mathcal AA (actions, nonempty), a transition kernel P(s′∣s,a)P(s'\mid s,a)P(s′∣s,a), rewards r(s,a)∈[0,1]r(s,a)\in[0,1]r(s,a)∈[0,1] and a discount factor γ∈[0,1)\gamma\in[0,1)γ∈[0,1). A policy π\piπ assigns to each state a distribution π(⋅∣s)\pi(\cdot\mid s)π(⋅∣s) over actions. Its value Vπ(s)V^\pi(s)Vπ(s) is the expected discounted sum of rewards started from sss; for a start distribution ρ\rhoρ, Vπ(ρ)=∑sρ(s)Vπ(s)V^\pi(\rho)=\sum_s\rho(s)V^\pi(s)Vπ(ρ)=∑s​ρ(s)Vπ(s). The state–action value is Qπ(s,a)=r(s,a)+γ∑s′P(s′∣s,a)Vπ(s′)Q^\pi(s,a)=r(s,a)+\gamma\sum_{s'}P(s'\mid s,a)V^\pi(s')Qπ(s,a)=r(s,a)+γ∑s′​P(s′∣s,a)Vπ(s′) and the advantage is Aπ(s,a)=Qπ(s,a)−Vπ(s)A^\pi(s,a)=Q^\pi(s,a)-V^\pi(s)Aπ(s,a)=Qπ(s,a)−Vπ(s). The discounted state visitation distribution is

dρπ(s)=(1−γ)∑t≥0γt Pr⁡π(st=s∣s0∼ρ).d^\pi_\rho(s)=(1-\gamma)\sum_{t\ge0}\gamma^t\,\Pr{}^\pi(s_t=s\mid s_0\sim\rho).dρπ​(s)=(1−γ)t≥0∑​γtPrπ(st​=s∣s0​∼ρ).

An optimal policy π⋆\pi^\starπ⋆ has Vπ⋆(s)≥Vπ(s)V^{\pi^\star}(s)\ge V^\pi(s)Vπ⋆(s)≥Vπ(s) for every policy π\piπ and every state sss; write V⋆=Vπ⋆V^\star=V^{\pi^\star}V⋆=Vπ⋆.

The softmax policy with parameter θ∈R∣S∣∣A∣\theta\in\mathbb R^{|\mathcal S||\mathcal A|}θ∈R∣S∣∣A∣ is πθ(a∣s)=exp⁡(θs,a)/∑a′exp⁡(θs,a′)\pi_\theta(a\mid s)=\exp(\theta_{s,a})/\sum_{a'}\exp(\theta_{s,a'})πθ​(a∣s)=exp(θs,a​)/∑a′​exp(θs,a′​). The Fisher information matrix with respect to ρ\rhoρ is

Fρ(θ)=Es∼dρπθEa∼πθ(⋅∣s)[∇θlog⁡πθ(a∣s) ∇θlog⁡πθ(a∣s)⊤],F_\rho(\theta)=\mathbb E_{s\sim d^{\pi_\theta}_\rho}\mathbb E_{a\sim\pi_\theta(\cdot\mid s)}\big[\nabla_\theta\log\pi_\theta(a\mid s)\,\nabla_\theta\log\pi_\theta(a\mid s)^\top\big],Fρ​(θ)=Es∼dρπθ​​​Ea∼πθ​(⋅∣s)​[∇θ​logπθ​(a∣s)∇θ​logπθ​(a∣s)⊤],

and the NPG update with step size η\etaη is

θ(t+1)=θ(t)+η Fρ(θ(t))† ∇θV(t)(ρ),(15)\theta^{(t+1)}=\theta^{(t)}+\eta\,F_\rho(\theta^{(t)})^\dagger\,\nabla_\theta V^{(t)}(\rho),\tag{15}θ(t+1)=θ(t)+ηFρ​(θ(t))†∇θ​V(t)(ρ),(15)

where M†M^\daggerM† is the Moore–Penrose pseudoinverse and π(t),V(t),A(t)\pi^{(t)},V^{(t)},A^{(t)}π(t),V(t),A(t) are the quantities of θ(t)\theta^{(t)}θ(t). Following §5.3, every state is assumed reachable from ρ\rhoρ: for each sss some policy π\piπ has dρπ(s)>0d^\pi_\rho(s)>0dρπ​(s)>0. The normalizer Zt(s)=∑aπ(t)(a∣s)exp⁡(ηA(t)(s,a)/(1−γ))Z_t(s)=\sum_a\pi^{(t)}(a\mid s)\exp(\eta A^{(t)}(s,a)/(1-\gamma))Zt​(s)=∑a​π(t)(a∣s)exp(ηA(t)(s,a)/(1−γ)) appears in the lemmas.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.3

For NPG (15) from θ(0)=0\theta^{(0)}=0θ(0)=0 with any fixed η>0\eta>0η>0, for all T>0T>0T>0,

V(T)(ρ) ≥ V⋆(ρ)−log⁡∣A∣ηT−1(1−γ)2T.V^{(T)}(\rho)\ \ge\ V^\star(\rho)-\frac{\log|\mathcal A|}{\eta T}-\frac{1}{(1-\gamma)^2T}.V(T)(ρ) ≥ V⋆(ρ)−ηTlog∣A∣​−(1−γ)2T1​.

Companion: iteration complexity

If moreover η≥(1−γ)2log⁡∣A∣\eta\ge(1-\gamma)^2\log|\mathcal A|η≥(1−γ)2log∣A∣ and ϵ>0\epsilon>0ϵ>0, then V⋆(ρ)−V(T)(ρ)≤ϵV^\star(\rho)-V^{(T)}(\rho)\le\epsilonV⋆(ρ)−V(T)(ρ)≤ϵ for every T≥2/((1−γ)2ϵ)T\ge 2/((1-\gamma)^2\epsilon)T≥2/((1−γ)2ϵ).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 3.2 (performance difference): Vπ(s0)−Vπ′(s0)=11−γEs∼ds0πEa∼π(⋅∣s)[Aπ′(s,a)]V^\pi(s_0)-V^{\pi'}(s_0)=\frac{1}{1-\gamma}\mathbb E_{s\sim d^\pi_{s_0}}\mathbb E_{a\sim\pi(\cdot\mid s)}[A^{\pi'}(s,a)]Vπ(s0​)−Vπ′(s0​)=1−γ1​Es∼ds0​π​​Ea∼π(⋅∣s)​[Aπ′(s,a)].
  2. Lemma 5.1 (soft policy iteration, policy form): π(t+1)(a∣s)=π(t)(a∣s)exp⁡(ηA(t)(s,a)/(1−γ))/Zt(s)\pi^{(t+1)}(a\mid s)=\pi^{(t)}(a\mid s)\exp(\eta A^{(t)}(s,a)/(1-\gamma))/Z_t(s)π(t+1)(a∣s)=π(t)(a∣s)exp(ηA(t)(s,a)/(1−γ))/Zt​(s).
  3. Lemma 5.2 (improvement): V(t+1)(μ)−V(t)(μ)≥1−γηEs∼μlog⁡Zt(s)≥0V^{(t+1)}(\mu)-V^{(t)}(\mu)\ge\frac{1-\gamma}{\eta}\mathbb E_{s\sim\mu}\log Z_t(s)\ge0V(t+1)(μ)−V(t)(μ)≥η1−γ​Es∼μ​logZt​(s)≥0 for every μ∈Δ(S)\mu\in\Delta(\mathcal S)μ∈Δ(S).
  4. Monotonicity (proof of Theorem 5.3): V(t+1)(s)≥V(t)(s)V^{(t+1)}(s)\ge V^{(t)}(s)V(t+1)(s)≥V(t)(s) for all sss.

Significance

The result. Theorem 5.3 is a global, non-asymptotic guarantee for a non-concave policy optimization problem, with no dependence on ∣S∣|\mathcal S|∣S∣ and no distribution mismatch coefficient: the same analysis does not go through for plain softmax policy gradient, whose rates in the same paper carry such coefficients or are only asymptotic. It explains why Fisher preconditioning helps, and it is the template for the paper's later analysis of NPG with function approximation (§6) and for subsequent work on linear convergence of NPG and on entropy-regularized variants.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved on paper; no machine-checked proof is known. A formal development needs: a policy-gradient identity for softmax policies, the computation of the Moore–Penrose pseudoinverse of a singular, block-structured Fisher matrix acting on the policy gradient, the performance difference lemma in the unnormalized convention, and a telescoping regret argument with Kullback–Leibler divergences between action distributions. Each of these is reusable: the performance difference lemma and the visitation-distribution calculus serve every result of the paper and much of the reinforcement-learning literature.

Difficulty

The obvious approach, treating NPG as gradient ascent on a smooth objective, fails: Vπθ(ρ)V^{\pi_\theta}(\rho)Vπθ​(ρ) is non-concave and its smoothness constant grows with 1/(1−γ)31/(1-\gamma)^31/(1−γ)3, which would give a rate depending on the state space and on distribution mismatch. The dimension-free rate comes only after the NPG step is rewritten exactly as a multiplicative-weights update on each state's action distribution, and this rewriting is itself delicate. The Fisher matrix is always singular (each state's block annihilates the all-ones vector), the pseudoinverse returns the minimum-norm solution, which is not A(t)/(1−γ)A^{(t)}/(1-\gamma)A(t)/(1−γ) but differs from it by a state-dependent offset; and the identity holds at a state only if that state carries positive visitation weight, which is why reachability from ρ\rhoρ is assumed. A newcomer's first idea, replacing F†F^\daggerF† by "any solution of Fu=∇VFu=\nabla VFu=∇V" or by an ordinary inverse, does not define the algorithm.

Formalization scope

Lean conventions (Mathlib, namespace PolicyGradTheory.NPG):

  • Policies are functions S → A → ℝ (π s a =π(a∣s)=\pi(a\mid s)=π(a∣s)) satisfying the published IsPolicy; transitions P s a s' =P(s′∣s,a)=P(s'\mid s,a)=P(s′∣s,a); values, QQQ-functions and state occupation probabilities are the published FoundationsML definitions PolicyValue, QFunction, OccupationDist, and optimality is IsOptimalPolicy. V⋆(ρ)V^\star(\rho)V⋆(ρ) is the value of a policy assumed optimal, never a supremum over arbitrary functions.
  • Parameters live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (S × A), so norms are Euclidean and gradient is ∇θ\nabla_\theta∇θ​.
  • The pseudoinverse is the published predicate VectorSpaceOpt.IsPseudoinverse (minimum-norm least-squares inverse, which on Euclidean space is the Moore–Penrose pseudoinverse); Mathlib has none.
  • Standing assumptions carried by every statement: rewards in [0,1][0,1][0,1], γ∈[0,1)\gamma\in[0,1)γ∈[0,1), A\mathcal AA nonempty, ρ∈Δ(S)\rho\in\Delta(\mathcal S)ρ∈Δ(S), every state reachable from ρ\rhoρ (§5.3, footnote 6). The goal also assumes θ(0)=0\theta^{(0)}=0θ(0)=0 and η>0\eta>0η>0, as the page does. Lemmas 5.1 and 5.2 hold from any start.
  • log⁡\loglog is the natural logarithm; TTT counts updates and T>0T>0T>0 is a natural number.

The goal does not assume the soft-policy-iteration form, the improvement bound or monotonicity; those are milestones to be proved, and a statement taking any of them as a hypothesis would not be Theorem 5.3. The parameter form "θ(t+1)=θ(t)+η1−γA(t)\theta^{(t+1)}=\theta^{(t)}+\frac{\eta}{1-\gamma}A^{(t)}θ(t+1)=θ(t)+1−γη​A(t)" of Lemma 5.1 is not stated, since the pseudoinverse step differs from it by a state-dependent offset (as the lemma's own proof on p. 70 shows); only the policy form, which is invariant to that offset, is a target.

Contributions welcome: the softmax policy-gradient identity and score-function formula, existence and uniqueness of the minimum-norm least-squares inverse on Euclidean space, Kullback–Leibler identities for finite distributions, and the summability facts behind the visitation distribution.

Selected references

  • A. Agarwal, S. M. Kakade, J. D. Lee, G. Mahajan, On the Theory of Policy Gradient Methods: Optimality, Approximation, and Distribution Shift, JMLR 22(98), 2021; preprint arXiv:1908.00261v5, 2020. https://arxiv.org/abs/1908.00261v5
  • S. M. Kakade, A Natural Policy Gradient, NeurIPS 2001. https://proceedings.neurips.cc/paper/2001/hash/4b86abe48d358ecf194c56c69108433e-Abstract.html
  • S. Kakade, J. Langford, Approximately Optimal Approximate Reinforcement Learning, ICML 2002. https://dl.acm.org/doi/10.5555/645531.656005
  • E. Even-Dar, S. M. Kakade, Y. Mansour, Online Markov Decision Processes, Mathematics of Operations Research 34(3), 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1090.0396
  • M. Geist, B. Scherrer, O. Pietquin, A Theory of Regularized Markov Decision Processes, ICML 2019. https://arxiv.org/abs/1901.11275
16 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Coordinating Inventory Control and Pricing Strategies with Random Demand and Fixed Ordering Cost: The Finite Horizon Case 1: Additive Demand: k-Concave Profit-to-Go, Optimal (s, S, p) PolicyResearch Paper

Motivation

A retailer that sets both its replenishment quantities and its prices over a finite selling season faces a coupled decision: the price shapes the demand that the inventory must serve, and the inventory position shapes which price is worth charging. With a fixed cost per order, the classical inventory answer is the (s, S) policy of Scarf (1960): when the stock falls below a reorder point sss, order up to the level SSS. Thomas (1974) asked what happens when the price is also a decision, and conjectured that an (s, S, p) policy — an (s, S) ordering rule together with a price that depends on the stock level — is optimal "under fairly general conditions". He also gave a counterexample when prices are restricted to a discrete set.

Chen and Simchi-Levi (Operations Research 52(6), 2004) settled the conjecture for the finite horizon. When demand is additive in a random shock, wt=Dt(pt)+βtw_t = D_t(p_t) + \beta_twt​=Dt​(pt​)+βt​, the conjecture holds (§3, Theorem 3.1). When the shock is not additive, it fails, and a weaker policy class is optimal (§4, the second mission of this series). This mission formalizes the additive case.

Timeline:

  • Scarf (1960): (s, S) policies are optimal for the fixed-cost inventory problem, through k-convexity.
  • Thomas (1974): conjectures (s, S, p) optimality with a continuous price range.
  • Federgruen and Heching (1999): joint pricing and inventory without a fixed cost; base-stock list-price policies are optimal.
  • Polatoglu and Sahin (2000): the lost-sales variant; sufficient conditions for (s, S, p) optimality.
  • Chen and Simchi-Levi (2004): (s, S, p) optimality for additive demand with backlogging, and its failure in general.

Setting

There are TTT periods t=1,…,Tt = 1, \dots, Tt=1,…,T. In period ttt the firm starts with inventory xxx, orders up to a level y≥xy \ge xy≥x at cost k δ(y−x)+ct(y−x)k\,\delta(y - x) + c_t(y - x)kδ(y−x)+ct​(y−x), where k≥0k \ge 0k≥0 is a fixed cost, ctc_tct​ a unit cost and δ(u)=1\delta(u) = 1δ(u)=1 if u>0u > 0u>0 and 000 otherwise, and sets a price. Demand is wt=αtDt(pt)+βtw_t = \alpha_t D_t(p_t) + \beta_twt​=αt​Dt​(pt​)+βt​ for a random pair ϵt=(αt,βt)\epsilon_t = (\alpha_t, \beta_t)ϵt​=(αt​,βt​) with Eαt=1\mathbb E\alpha_t = 1Eαt​=1, Eβt=0\mathbb E\beta_t = 0Eβt​=0; in the additive case αt=1\alpha_t = 1αt​=1. Unmet demand is backlogged, and an end-of-period inventory xxx costs ht(x)h_t(x)ht​(x), a convex function.

Since price and expected demand determine each other, the decision is an expected demand d∈[d‾t,dˉt]d \in [\underline d_t, \bar d_t]d∈[d​t​,dˉt​], with price Pt(d)=Dt−1(d)P_t(d) = D_t^{-1}(d)Pt​(d)=Dt−1​(d) and expected revenue Rt(d)=d Pt(d)R_t(d) = d\,P_t(d)Rt​(d)=dPt​(d), assumed concave. With Gt(y,d)=E ht(y−αtd−βt)G_t(y, d) = \mathbb E\,h_t(y - \alpha_t d - \beta_t)Gt​(y,d)=Eht​(y−αt​d−βt​), the profit-to-go functions satisfy vT+1≡0v_{T+1} \equiv 0vT+1​≡0 and, for t=T,…,1t = T, \dots, 1t=T,…,1,

vt(x)=ctx+max⁡y≥x[−k δ(y−x)+gt(y,dt(y))],(2)v_t(x) = c_t x + \max_{y \ge x}\Big[-k\,\delta(y - x) + g_t\big(y, d_t(y)\big)\Big], \qquad (2)vt​(x)=ct​x+y≥xmax​[−kδ(y−x)+gt​(y,dt​(y))],(2) gt(y,d)=Rt(d)−cty+E{−ht(y−αtd−βt)+vt+1(y−αtd−βt)},(3)g_t(y, d) = R_t(d) - c_t y + \mathbb E\big\{-h_t(y - \alpha_t d - \beta_t) + v_{t+1}(y - \alpha_t d - \beta_t)\big\}, \qquad (3)gt​(y,d)=Rt​(d)−ct​y+E{−ht​(y−αt​d−βt​)+vt+1​(y−αt​d−βt​)},(3)

where dt(y)d_t(y)dt​(y) maximizes gt(y,⋅)g_t(y, \cdot)gt​(y,⋅) over [d‾t,dˉt][\underline d_t, \bar d_t][d​t​,dˉt​]. A function fff is k-convex if k+f(z+y)≥f(y)+zb(f(y)−f(y−b))k + f(z + y) \ge f(y) + \frac{z}{b}\big(f(y) - f(y - b)\big)k+f(z+y)≥f(y)+bz​(f(y)−f(y−b)) for all z≥0z \ge 0z≥0, b>0b > 0b>0, yyy (Definition 2.1), and k-concave if −f-f−f is k-convex. Assumptions 3–5 of the paper give GtG_tGt​ the stated one-sided growth limits and polynomial growth O(∣y∣ρ)O(|y|^\rho)O(∣y∣ρ), and give demand a finite ρ\rhoρ-th moment.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1(c)–(d)

For additive demand and every period ttt: gt(y,⋅)g_t(y, \cdot)gt​(y,⋅) attains its maximum at some dt(y)d_t(y)dt​(y), the functions y↦gt(y,dt(y))y \mapsto g_t(y, d_t(y))y↦gt​(y,dt​(y)) and x↦vt(x)x \mapsto v_t(x)x↦vt​(x) are k-concave, and there exist st≤Sts_t \le S_tst​≤St​ such that

y∗(x)={St,x<st,x,x≥st,y^*(x) = \begin{cases} S_t, & x < s_t,\\ x, & x \ge s_t,\end{cases}y∗(x)={St​,x,​x<st​,x≥st​,​

maximizes −k δ(y−x)+gt(y,dt(y))-k\,\delta(y - x) + g_t(y, d_t(y))−kδ(y−x)+gt​(y,dt​(y)) over y≥xy \ge xy≥x, vt(x)=ctx−k δ(y∗(x)−x)+gt(y∗(x),dt(y∗(x)))v_t(x) = c_t x - k\,\delta(y^*(x) - x) + g_t(y^*(x), d_t(y^*(x)))vt​(x)=ct​x−kδ(y∗(x)−x)+gt​(y∗(x),dt​(y∗(x))), and a best expected demand exists at y∗(x)y^*(x)y∗(x); the price is Dt−1D_t^{-1}Dt−1​ of it.

Milestones

  1. Definitions 2.1 and 2.2 of k-convexity are equivalent.
  2. Lemma 1(d): a continuous coercive k-convex function has the (s, S) shape (already proved on the platform).
  3. Lemma 2: a maximizer dt(y)d_t(y)dt​(y) can be chosen with y−dt(y)y - d_t(y)y−dt​(y) nondecreasing.
  4. Theorem 3.1(a): gt(y,d)=O(∣y∣ρ)g_t(y, d) = O(|y|^\rho)gt​(y,d)=O(∣y∣ρ) and vt(x)=O(∣x∣ρ)v_t(x) = O(|x|^\rho)vt​(x)=O(∣x∣ρ).
  5. Theorem 3.1(b): gtg_tgt​ is continuous, gt(y,d)→−∞g_t(y, d) \to -\inftygt​(y,d)→−∞ as ∣y∣→∞|y| \to \infty∣y∣→∞, and dt(y)d_t(y)dt​(y) exists.
  6. Inequality (7): gt(y,dt(y))g_t(y, d_t(y))gt​(y,dt​(y)) is k-concave when the continuation value is.
  7. The display of vtv_tvt​: its (s, S) form and the transfer of k-concavity from gt(y,dt(y))g_t(y, d_t(y))gt​(y,dt​(y)) to vtv_tvt​.

Significance

The theorem identifies the structure of an optimal policy for a basic model of coordinated pricing and replenishment: two numbers per period determine the ordering decision, and the price is a function of the post-order stock. It confirms Thomas's conjecture in the additive case and tells a computation or an approximation scheme which policy class it may restrict to; §5 of the paper extends it to a nonincreasing fixed cost, the infinite horizon and Markovian demand.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. A formalization adds checked versions of the k-convexity toolkit (the equivalence of the two standard definitions; the (s, S) structure lemma), a checked monotone-selection argument for a parametric maximization, and a checked finite-horizon induction in which an expectation, a maximization over a continuous action and a fixed cost interact. The proof of part (a) is omitted in the paper ("similar to that of Theorem 1 in Federgruen and Heching (1999)"), so formalizing it supplies a missing argument.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at the expectation. A k-concave function composed with a shift y↦y−d−βy \mapsto y - d - \betay↦y−d−β is k-concave for a fixed ddd, but here the demand decision depends on yyy, and k-concavity, unlike concavity, is not preserved under an arbitrary reparametrization: Definition 2.2 is asymmetric in its two points. The inequality needed for the continuation value requires the post-demand levels y−dt(y)−βty - d_t(y) - \beta_ty−dt​(y)−βt​ to be ordered like the inventory levels yyy. That is the content of Lemma 2, and it uses additivity; for multiplicative demand the ordering fails, and so does the theorem (§4).

The second difficulty is analytic: each step of the induction needs a continuous continuation value of polynomial growth, so that the expectation in (3) is finite and continuous, the maximum over ddd is attained, and gtg_tgt​ is coercive.

Formalization scope

The model is a structure of real data indexed by t∈Nt \in \mathbb Nt∈N, with periods 1,…,T1, \dots, T1,…,T; the law of (αt,βt)(\alpha_t, \beta_t)(αt​,βt​) is a probability measure on R2\mathbb R^2R2 and expectations are Bochner integrals. The formalization works in expected-demand space d∈[d‾t,dˉt]d \in [\underline d_t, \bar d_t]d∈[d​t​,dˉt​], equivalent to price space because DtD_tDt​ is a continuous strictly decreasing bijection. Additivity is "αt=1\alpha_t = 1αt​=1 almost surely". The profit-to-go is defined by recursion on the number of periods to go, with vT+1=0v_{T+1} = 0vT+1​=0. Maxima are written as real suprema; every target that uses them asserts that they are attained, so the convention that an unbounded supremum is 000 never enters. k-convexity is the platform's BertsekasKConvex (Definition 2.1); k-concavity of fff is k-convexity of −f-f−f.

Conventions and restrictions relative to the printed page:

  • O(∣y∣ρ)O(|y|^\rho)O(∣y∣ρ) is an explicit bound C(1+∣y∣ρ)C(1 + |y|^\rho)C(1+∣y∣ρ) with ρ∈N\rho \in \mathbb Nρ∈N, uniform in ddd.
  • Assumption 5, printed E{Dt(p,ϵt)}ρ<∞E\{D_t(p, \epsilon_t)\}^\rho < \inftyE{Dt​(p,ϵt​)}ρ<∞, is read as E∣αtd+βt∣ρ<∞\mathbb E|\alpha_t d + \beta_t|^\rho < \inftyE∣αt​d+βt​∣ρ<∞.
  • Integrability of ht(y−αtd−βt)h_t(y - \alpha_t d - \beta_t)ht​(y−αt​d−βt​) is part of Assumption 4, and Theorem 3.1(a) also asserts that the expectation of vt+1v_{t+1}vt+1​ in (3) is finite.
  • Added hypotheses: cT+1=0c_{T+1} = 0cT+1​=0 (the paper uses cT+1c_{T+1}cT+1​ without defining it), ct≥0c_t \ge 0ct​≥0 (used in the proof of part (b); without it gtg_tgt​ need not tend to −∞-\infty−∞), and k≥0k \ge 0k≥0.
  • Independence across periods is not stated; the dynamic program uses only each period's marginal law.
  • The paper writes st<Sts_t < S_tst​<St​ in the proof; for k=0k = 0k=0 equality is possible, so the targets use st≤Sts_t \le S_tst​≤St​.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the targets assert attainment of every maximum they mention and the identity between vt(x)v_t(x)vt​(x) and the maximized objective, so a supremum that defaults to 000, or an integral of a non-integrable function, cannot make them hold vacuously; and the assumptions are satisfiable (a one-period instance with h(x)=∣x∣h(x) = |x|h(x)=∣x∣ meets all of them).

A complete development needs: continuity of parametric integrals under polynomial domination; attainment of maxima over compact intervals; Topkis-style monotone selection for functions with increasing differences; the (s, S) structure lemma for k-convex functions (proved on the platform); and the closure of k-concavity under the operations above. The k-convexity results and the monotone-selection lemma are reusable for the general-demand mission of this series and for other fixed-cost inventory models. Contributions to any milestone are welcome, including proofs that rely on platform results by Topkis (Supermodularity.Monotonicity.argmax_increasing_of_increasing_differences).

Selected references

  • X. Chen, D. Simchi-Levi, Coordinating Inventory Control and Pricing Strategies with Random Demand and Fixed Ordering Cost: The Finite Horizon Case, Operations Research 52(6), 887–896, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1040.0127
  • H. Scarf, The Optimality of (S, s) Policies in the Dynamic Inventory Problem, in Mathematical Methods in the Social Sciences, Stanford University Press, 1960.
  • L. J. Thomas, Price and Production Decisions with Random Demand, Operations Research 22, 513–518, 1974.
  • E. L. Porteus, On the Optimality of Generalized (s, S) Policies, Management Science 17, 411–426, 1971.
  • A. Federgruen, A. Heching, Combined Pricing and Inventory Control Under Uncertainty, Operations Research 47(3), 454–475, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.47.3.454
  • H. Polatoglu, I. Sahin, Optimal Procurement Policies under Price-Dependent Demand, International Journal of Production Economics 65, 141–171, 2000.
  • D. M. Topkis, Supermodularity and Complementarity, Princeton University Press, 1998.
  • D. P. Bertsekas, Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control, Vol. I, Athena Scientific, 1995.
11 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationMachine Learning·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity V: Projected Gradient Descent on a Convex β-Smooth Function Has Rate (3β‖x₁ − x*‖² + f(x₁) − f(x*))/tTextbook

Motivation

Many optimization problems in statistics, machine learning and operations research ask to minimize a smooth convex function over a simple convex set: a box, a ball, a simplex, a cone of positive semidefinite matrices. Projected gradient descent is the most basic first-order method for such problems. It takes a gradient step and then returns to the feasible set by Euclidean projection. Its cost per iteration is one gradient evaluation and one projection, independent of the dimension apart from the cost of manipulating vectors, which is why it remains a workhorse in very high dimension.

This mission is the fifth in a series formalizing S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity (Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(3–4), 2015; arXiv:1405.4980). Chapter 3 of the monograph treats "dimension-free" convex optimization. Its §3.2 first proves that gradient descent on a convex β\betaβ-smooth function on Rn\mathbb R^nRn has rate O(β∥x1−x∗∥2/t)O(\beta\|x_1-x^*\|^2/t)O(β∥x1​−x∗∥2/t) (Theorem 3.3, the subject of mission IV), and then turns to the constrained case, which is the subject of this mission. The analysis follows Nesterov's Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization (2004).

Setting

Write x⊤yx^\top yx⊤y for the Euclidean inner product on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ for the Euclidean norm. The constraint set X⊆Rn\mathcal X\subseteq\mathbb R^nX⊆Rn is compact and convex; this is the standing assumption of Chapter 3. The Euclidean projection of y∈Rny\in\mathbb R^ny∈Rn onto X\mathcal XX is

ΠX(y)=argmin⁡z∈X∥y−z∥,\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)=\operatorname*{argmin}_{z\in\mathcal X}\|y-z\| ,ΠX​(y)=z∈Xargmin​∥y−z∥,

which exists and is unique for a nonempty closed convex set.

A differentiable function f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R is β\betaβ-smooth on X\mathcal XX if its gradient is β\betaβ-Lipschitz there:

∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤β∥x−y∥(x,y∈X).\|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(y)\|\le\beta\|x-y\|\qquad(x,y\in\mathcal X).∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤β∥x−y∥(x,y∈X).

It is α\alphaα-strongly convex on X\mathcal XX if f(x)−f(y)≤∇f(x)⊤(x−y)−α2∥x−y∥2f(x)-f(y)\le\nabla f(x)^\top(x-y)-\frac\alpha2\|x-y\|^2f(x)−f(y)≤∇f(x)⊤(x−y)−2α​∥x−y∥2 for x,y∈Xx,y\in\mathcal Xx,y∈X. A minimizer x∗∈Xx^*\in\mathcal Xx∗∈X of fff over X\mathcal XX is assumed to exist, as everywhere in the monograph.

Projected gradient descent with step size η=1/β\eta=1/\betaη=1/β starts at x1∈Xx_1\in\mathcal Xx1​∈X and iterates

xt+1=ΠX(xt−1β∇f(xt))(t≥1).x_{t+1}=\Pi_{\mathcal X}\Bigl(x_t-\tfrac1\beta\nabla f(x_t)\Bigr)\qquad(t\ge1).xt+1​=ΠX​(xt​−β1​∇f(xt​))(t≥1).

For a point xxx with projected step x+=ΠX(x−1β∇f(x))x^+=\Pi_{\mathcal X}\bigl(x-\frac1\beta\nabla f(x)\bigr)x+=ΠX​(x−β1​∇f(x)), the gradient mapping is gX(x)=β(x−x+)g_{\mathcal X}(x)=\beta(x-x^+)gX​(x)=β(x−x+). Without constraints it equals ∇f(x)\nabla f(x)∇f(x).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.7 (p. 270)

For fff convex and β\betaβ-smooth on X\mathcal XX, projected gradient descent with η=1/β\eta=1/\betaη=1/β satisfies, for every t≥1t\ge1t≥1,

f(xt)−f(x∗)≤3β∥x1−x∗∥2+f(x1)−f(x∗)t.f(x_t)-f(x^*)\le\frac{3\beta\|x_1-x^*\|^2+f(x_1)-f(x^*)}{t}.f(xt​)−f(x∗)≤t3β∥x1​−x∗∥2+f(x1​)−f(x∗)​.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 3.1 (p. 263): for x∈Xx\in\mathcal Xx∈X and y∈Rny\in\mathbb R^ny∈Rn, (ΠX(y)−x)⊤(ΠX(y)−y)≤0(\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)-x)^\top(\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)-y)\le0(ΠX​(y)−x)⊤(ΠX​(y)−y)≤0, and hence ∥ΠX(y)−x∥2+∥y−ΠX(y)∥2≤∥y−x∥2\|\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)-x\|^2+\|y-\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)\|^2\le\|y-x\|^2∥ΠX​(y)−x∥2+∥y−ΠX​(y)∥2≤∥y−x∥2. The first claim is an already proved platform theorem.
  2. (3.7) (p. 270): ∇f(x)⊤(x+−y)≤gX(x)⊤(x+−y)\nabla f(x)^\top(x^+-y)\le g_{\mathcal X}(x)^\top(x^+-y)∇f(x)⊤(x+−y)≤gX​(x)⊤(x+−y) for y∈Xy\in\mathcal Xy∈X.
  3. Lemma 3.6 (p. 270): for x,y∈Xx,y\in\mathcal Xx,y∈X,
f(x+)−f(y)≤gX(x)⊤(x−y)−12β∥gX(x)∥2.f(x^+)-f(y)\le g_{\mathcal X}(x)^\top(x-y)-\frac1{2\beta}\|g_{\mathcal X}(x)\|^2 .f(x+)−f(y)≤gX​(x)⊤(x−y)−2β1​∥gX​(x)∥2.
  1. Descent and gap (pp. 270–271): f(xs+1)−f(xs)≤−12β∥gX(xs)∥2f(x_{s+1})-f(x_s)\le-\frac1{2\beta}\|g_{\mathcal X}(x_s)\|^2f(xs+1​)−f(xs​)≤−2β1​∥gX​(xs​)∥2 and f(xs+1)−f(x∗)≤∥gX(xs)∥ ∥xs−x∗∥f(x_{s+1})-f(x^*)\le\|g_{\mathcal X}(x_s)\|\,\|x_s-x^*\|f(xs+1​)−f(x∗)≤∥gX​(xs​)∥∥xs​−x∗∥.
  2. Distances decrease (p. 271): ∥xs+1−x∗∥≤∥xs−x∗∥\|x_{s+1}-x^*\|\le\|x_s-x^*\|∥xs+1​−x∗∥≤∥xs​−x∗∥.
  3. Recursion and induction (p. 271): with δs=f(xs)−f(x∗)\delta_s=f(x_s)-f(x^*)δs​=f(xs​)−f(x∗), δs+1≤δs−12β∥x1−x∗∥2δs+12\delta_{s+1}\le\delta_s-\frac{1}{2\beta\|x_1-x^*\|^2}\delta_{s+1}^2δs+1​≤δs​−2β∥x1​−x∗∥21​δs+12​, and an induction on this recursion gives the bound of Theorem 3.7.

Companion: Theorem 3.10 (p. 278)

If fff is in addition α\alphaα-strongly convex on X\mathcal XX, with condition number κ=β/α\kappa=\beta/\alphaκ=β/α, then the strengthened Lemma 3.6, display (3.14), gives for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0

∥xt+1−x∗∥2≤exp⁡(−tκ)∥x1−x∗∥2.\|x_{t+1}-x^*\|^2\le\exp\Bigl(-\frac t\kappa\Bigr)\|x_1-x^*\|^2 .∥xt+1​−x∗∥2≤exp(−κt​)∥x1​−x∗∥2.

Significance

Theorem 3.7 shows that a constraint set with a cheap projection costs nothing in the order of convergence: the O(β∥x1−x∗∥2/t)O(\beta\|x_1-x^*\|^2/t)O(β∥x1​−x∗∥2/t) rate of unconstrained gradient descent survives, with a constant that depends on f(x1)−f(x∗)f(x_1)-f(x^*)f(x1​)−f(x∗). Lemma 3.6 is the reusable part. It isolates the gradient mapping as the quantity that measures progress under constraints, and the same inequality, with a strong-convexity term added, gives the linear rate of Theorem 3.10. It is also the starting point of the analysis of proximal gradient methods for composite objectives.

All of these results are classical and proved in the textbook. As far as a search of the platform shows, none of them is formalized there. A related platform theorem on constrained gradient descent for well-conditioned functions (from Hazan's Introduction to Online Convex Optimization) bounds function values with a different exponent. It is not Theorem 3.10, which bounds distances with rate exp⁡(−t/κ)\exp(-t/\kappa)exp(−t/κ). This mission adds machine-checked statements of the constrained analysis in Bubeck's formulation, with the book's constants. The definitions of β\betaβ-smoothness on a set, the gradient mapping and the run predicate can be reused by later missions on accelerated and proximal methods.

Difficulty

The obvious attempt is to copy the unconstrained proof, which rests on the descent inequality f(x−1β∇f(x))≤f(x)−12β∥∇f(x)∥2f(x-\frac1\beta\nabla f(x))\le f(x)-\frac1{2\beta}\|\nabla f(x)\|^2f(x−β1​∇f(x))≤f(x)−2β1​∥∇f(x)∥2. That inequality fails under constraints: the projection can cut the step short, so the decrease in fff is not controlled by ∥∇f(x)∥\|\nabla f(x)\|∥∇f(x)∥. At a boundary minimizer, for instance, ∇f(x∗)≠0\nabla f(x^*)\neq0∇f(x∗)=0 while no step makes progress. The proof has to replace the gradient by the gradient mapping throughout. It also has to show separately that the iterates do not move away from x∗x^*x∗, a fact that came for free without constraints from co-coercivity of the gradient (display (3.6)).

The closing induction is not routine either. The step from sss to s+1s+1s+1 works only from s=2s=2s=2 on, and the step from 111 to 222 needs a direct computation that uses the term f(x1)−f(x∗)f(x_1)-f(x^*)f(x1​)−f(x∗) in the numerator.

Formalization scope

  • Space. Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), and x⊤yx^\top yx⊤y is ⟪x, y⟫_ℝ.
  • Constraint set and minimizer. Every statement assumes X\mathcal XX compact (IsCompact X) and convex (Convex ℝ X), the standing assumption of Chapter 3. Every statement about a run assumes a minimizer x∗∈Xx^*\in\mathcal Xx∗∈X with f(x∗)≤f(y)f(x^*)\le f(y)f(x∗)≤f(y) for all y∈Xy\in\mathcal Xy∈X, the monograph's standing assumption.
  • Gradient. The gradient is an explicit map g with HasGradientAt f (g x) x at every point of Rn\mathbb R^nRn, so ∇f(x)\nabla f(x)∇f(x) is defined at boundary points of X\mathcal XX. β\betaβ-smoothness on X\mathcal XX (IsBetaSmoothOn X f g β) asks this together with β≥0\beta\ge0β≥0 and the Lipschitz bound on X\mathcal XX only. It is not the quadratic upper bound (3.4), which is a consequence.
  • Strong convexity. It is the published predicate OnlineConvexOpt.ConvexBasics.StronglyConvexOn X f g α, which is display (3.13) with the same gradient map. Display (3.14) and Theorem 3.10 use α>0\alpha>0α>0.
  • Projection. The projection is the published relation IsMetricProjection X y p: p∈Xp\in\mathcal Xp∈X and ∥y−p∥≤∥y−z∥\|y-p\|\le\|y-z\|∥y−p∥≤∥y−z∥ for every z∈Xz\in\mathcal Xz∈X. No choice function is used.
  • Run. A run is IsProjGDRun X g β x: β>0\beta>0β>0, x1∈Xx_1\in\mathcal Xx1​∈X, and for every t≥1t\ge1t≥1 the iterate xt+1x_{t+1}xt+1​ is a projection of xt−β−1g(xt)x_t-\beta^{-1}g(x_t)xt​−β−1g(xt​). Indices start at 111 as in the book, and x 0 is unused.
  • Gradient mapping. gradMap β x xplus =β(x−x+)=\beta(x-x^+)=β(x−x+) takes the projected point of the run as an argument.
  • Positivity. β>0\beta>0β>0 is assumed, as the step size 1/β1/\beta1/β requires, and α>0\alpha>0α>0 for Theorem 3.10, as κ=β/α\kappa=\beta/\alphaκ=β/α requires.
  • The recursion. The recursion of milestone 6 is stated multiplied by 2β∥x1−x∗∥22\beta\|x_1-x^*\|^22β∥x1​−x∗∥2, so the case x1=x∗x_1=x^*x1​=x∗ needs no division.
  • No trivial readings. A run predicate with a free step size, or β\betaβ-smoothness replaced by the quadratic bound (3.4), would change the content. Both are excluded: the step is fixed to 1/β1/\beta1/β, and smoothness is the Lipschitz condition on the gradient.

Contributions are welcome on any milestone. Lemma 3.1 and (3.7) need only the variational characterization of the projection. Lemma 3.6 needs the quadratic upper bound for a function whose gradient is Lipschitz on a convex set, together with the first-order characterization of convexity relative to a set. Both are of independent use. The induction milestone is a self-contained statement about real sequences.

Selected references

  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(3–4):231–358, 2015. arXiv:1405.4980
  • Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2004. doi:10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
  • E. Hazan, Introduction to Online Convex Optimization, 2nd ed., MIT Press, 2022. arXiv:1909.05207
12 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationMachine Learning·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity III: Projected Subgradient Descent with η = R/(L√t) Satisfies f(average) − f(x*) ≤ RL/√tTextbook

Motivation

Many convex optimization problems in machine learning and statistics have objectives that are convex but not differentiable: hinge losses, ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ penalties, maxima of finitely many affine functions, and the dual functions of Lagrangian relaxations. Methods that rely on gradients do not apply to them directly, while cutting-plane methods such as the ellipsoid method pay a price that grows with the dimension. The projected subgradient method replaces the gradient by an arbitrary subgradient and restores feasibility by a Euclidean projection. Its guarantee depends on the dimension only through two constants, a radius RRR and a Lipschitz constant LLL. This is the reason it, and its descendants (mirror descent, stochastic gradient descent, online gradient descent), are the standard tools for large-scale nonsmooth problems.

The rate analysed here goes back to the subgradient methods of Shor and Polyak in the 1960s and 1970s and to the lower bounds of Nemirovski and Yudin (1983). The book follows the presentation of Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization (2004). The strongly convex variant with weights proportional to sss is from Lacoste-Julien, Schmidt and Bach (2012).

This mission is the third of a series formalizing S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity (Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning, 2015), and covers the preamble of Chapter 3, Section 3.1 and Section 3.4.1.

Setting

Let Rn\mathbb R^nRn carry the Euclidean inner product x⊤yx^\top yx⊤y and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. Let X⊆Rn\mathcal X\subseteq\mathbb R^nX⊆Rn be compact and convex, and let fff be a convex function on X\mathcal XX with a minimizer x∗∈Xx^*\in\mathcal Xx∗∈X.

A vector ggg is a subgradient of fff at x∈Xx\in\mathcal Xx∈X if f(x)−f(y)≤g⊤(x−y)f(x)-f(y)\le g^\top(x-y)f(x)−f(y)≤g⊤(x−y) for every y∈Xy\in\mathcal Xy∈X. The set of subgradients at xxx is written ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x). The projection ΠX(y)\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)ΠX​(y) of a point y∈Rny\in\mathbb R^ny∈Rn is the point of X\mathcal XX nearest to yyy.

Fix step sizes ηs>0\eta_s>0ηs​>0. Projected subgradient descent starts at some x1∈Xx_1\in\mathcal Xx1​∈X and iterates, for s≥1s\ge1s≥1,

ys+1=xs−ηsgs,gs∈∂f(xs),xs+1=ΠX(ys+1).y_{s+1}=x_s-\eta_s g_s,\quad g_s\in\partial f(x_s),\qquad x_{s+1}=\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y_{s+1}).ys+1​=xs​−ηs​gs​,gs​∈∂f(xs​),xs+1​=ΠX​(ys+1​).

Any subgradient may be chosen at each step. In Section 3.1 the step is constant, ηs=η\eta_s=\etaηs​=η. The set X\mathcal XX lies in the Euclidean ball of radius RRR centred at x1x_1x1​, and the subgradients have norm at most LLL.

A function fff is α\alphaα-strongly convex on X\mathcal XX if f(x)−f(y)≤g⊤(x−y)−α2∥x−y∥2f(x)-f(y)\le g^\top(x-y)-\frac{\alpha}{2}\|x-y\|^2f(x)−f(y)≤g⊤(x−y)−2α​∥x−y∥2 for all x,y∈Xx,y\in\mathcal Xx,y∈X and g∈∂f(x)g\in\partial f(x)g∈∂f(x).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2

For every horizon t≥1t\ge1t≥1, projected subgradient descent with the constant step η=R/(Lt)\eta=R/(L\sqrt t)η=R/(Lt​) satisfies

f(1t∑s=1txs)−f(x∗)≤RLt.f\Big(\frac1t\sum_{s=1}^{t}x_s\Big)-f(x^*)\le\frac{RL}{\sqrt t}.f(t1​s=1∑t​xs​)−f(x∗)≤t​RL​.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 3.1. For x∈Xx\in\mathcal Xx∈X and y∈Rny\in\mathbb R^ny∈Rn: (ΠX(y)−x)⊤(ΠX(y)−y)≤0(\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)-x)^\top(\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)-y)\le0(ΠX​(y)−x)⊤(ΠX​(y)−y)≤0, already on the platform as a published theorem. The mission also states its consequence
∥ΠX(y)−x∥2+∥y−ΠX(y)∥2≤∥y−x∥2.\|\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)-x\|^2+\|y-\Pi_{\mathcal X}(y)\|^2\le\|y-x\|^2 .∥ΠX​(y)−x∥2+∥y−ΠX​(y)∥2≤∥y−x∥2.
  1. The per-step inequality in the proof of Theorem 3.2:
f(xs)−f(x∗)≤12η(∥xs−x∗∥2−∥ys+1−x∗∥2)+η2∥gs∥2.f(x_s)-f(x^*)\le\frac1{2\eta}\big(\|x_s-x^*\|^2-\|y_{s+1}-x^*\|^2\big)+\frac\eta2\|g_s\|^2 .f(xs​)−f(x∗)≤2η1​(∥xs​−x∗∥2−∥ys+1​−x∗∥2)+2η​∥gs​∥2.
  1. The summed inequality for any constant step η>0\eta>0η>0:
∑s=1t(f(xs)−f(x∗))≤R22η+ηL2t2.\sum_{s=1}^{t}\big(f(x_s)-f(x^*)\big)\le\frac{R^2}{2\eta}+\frac{\eta L^2t}{2}.s=1∑t​(f(xs​)−f(x∗))≤2ηR2​+2ηL2t​.

Companion: Theorem 3.9

If fff is α\alphaα-strongly convex and its subgradients are bounded by LLL, then with ηs=2/(α(s+1))\eta_s=2/(\alpha(s+1))ηs​=2/(α(s+1)),

f(∑s=1t2st(t+1)xs)−f(x∗)≤2L2α(t+1).f\Big(\sum_{s=1}^{t}\frac{2s}{t(t+1)}x_s\Big)-f(x^*)\le\frac{2L^2}{\alpha(t+1)}.f(s=1∑t​t(t+1)2s​xs​)−f(x∗)≤α(t+1)2L2​.

Significance

Theorem 3.2 gives an oracle complexity of O(R2L2/ε2)O(R^2L^2/\varepsilon^2)O(R2L2/ε2) for reaching an ε\varepsilonε-optimal point, independent of the ambient dimension. Section 3.5 of the book shows this rate is unimprovable for black-box first-order methods once the dimension is large. Theorem 3.9 shows how strong convexity improves the rate to O(1/t)O(1/t)O(1/t), with the averaging weights changed from uniform to linear. These two bounds are the reference points against which the rest of Chapter 3 and Chapters 4 to 6 (smooth, accelerated, mirror, stochastic methods) are measured.

The results are classical and their proofs are short. Formalizing them produces a reusable, machine-checked account of the basic projected first-order step: the projection inequality, the one-step distance recursion, and the telescoping argument with Jensen's inequality for averaged iterates. To our knowledge, no machine-checked proof of the averaged-iterate bound for the projected subgradient method exists in Mathlib. Related platform items cover other algorithms or other averaging schemes.

Difficulty

The arithmetic is elementary, and the obvious argument works. The care is in the bookkeeping. The projection must be shown not to increase the distance to x∗x^*x∗, which needs convexity of X\mathcal XX and the variational characterization of the nearest point. The sum must telescope with a horizon-dependent constant step. Jensen's inequality must be applied to a finite convex combination of points of X\mathcal XX, which requires showing that the average lies in X\mathcal XX. In Theorem 3.9 the step sizes and the averaging weights are coupled, so neither can be changed independently. In Lean, the iterates are indexed from 111 with natural-number horizons, and the bounds involve t\sqrt tt​, so these casts need care.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). The iterates are sequences ℕ → EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with the first iterate at index 111. The projection is the published relation OnlineConvexOpt.FirstOrder.IsMetricProjection (xs+1∈Xx_{s+1}\in\mathcal Xxs+1​∈X is a nearest point to ys+1y_{s+1}ys+1​). Subgradients are taken relative to X\mathcal XX (Definition 1.2). A run is a predicate on the steps s=1,…,ts=1,\dots,ts=1,…,t, and every theorem holds for all runs, that is, for every choice of subgradients. Compactness and convexity of X\mathcal XX, convexity of fff on X\mathcal XX and the existence of the minimizer x∗x^*x∗ are the book's standing assumptions and appear as hypotheses. R>0R>0R>0, L>0L>0L>0 and α>0\alpha>0α>0 are explicit, because Lean's division by zero would otherwise turn the step size into a junk value.

The book assumes ∥g∥≤L\|g\|\le L∥g∥≤L for every subgradient at every point of X\mathcal XX. With subgradients relative to a compact X\mathcal XX, that assumption can never hold at a boundary point, since every outward normal can be added to a subgradient. Stated that way the theorems would be vacuous. The mission therefore assumes the bound only for the subgradients g1,…,gtg_1,\dots,g_tg1​,…,gt​ that the run uses. This is a weaker hypothesis and gives a stronger, non-vacuous statement. Bounding only these subgradients is a deliberate choice, not a trivialization: the bound still constrains every quantity the conclusion depends on.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the four inequalities and of the two rates, and a reusable lemma that the convex combination of finitely many points of a convex set lies in the set, together with Jensen's inequality in the form used here.

Selected references

  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(3–4):231–358, 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1405.4980
  • Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
  • A. Nemirovski and D. Yudin, Problem Complexity and Method Efficiency in Optimization, Wiley, 1983.
  • S. Lacoste-Julien, M. Schmidt and F. Bach, A simpler approach to obtaining an O(1/t) convergence rate for the projected stochastic subgradient method, 2012. https://arxiv.org/abs/1212.2002
  • N. Z. Shor, Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions, Springer, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9
7 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity I: The Center of Gravity Method Satisfies f(x_t) − min f ≤ 2B(1 − 1/e)^{t/n}Textbook

Motivation

Black-box convex optimization asks how many queries to an oracle are needed to minimize a convex function to accuracy ε\varepsilonε. In fixed dimension nnn the answer is of order nlog⁡(1/ε)n\log(1/\varepsilon)nlog(1/ε), and the first algorithm to attain it is the center of gravity method, discovered independently by Levin (1965) and Newman (1965). It is the opening example of cutting plane methods: algorithms that keep a set known to contain a minimizer and shrink it with one half-space per oracle call. The ellipsoid method and Vaidya's method, which underlie the polynomial-time solvability of linear programming and convex feasibility problems, follow the same template with cheaper sets. This mission is the first of a series formalizing S. Bubeck's monograph Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity (2015), and covers its §2.1.

Timeline:

  • 1960: B. Grünbaum proves that every half-space whose boundary passes through the centroid of a convex body in Rn\mathbb R^nRn contains at least a fraction (n/(n+1))n≥1/e(n/(n+1))^n \ge 1/e(n/(n+1))n≥1/e of its volume.
  • 1965: A. Levin and D. J. Newman independently introduce the center of gravity method and prove its linear rate.
  • 1983: A. Nemirovski and D. Yudin show that Ω(nlog⁡(1/ε))\Omega(n\log(1/\varepsilon))Ω(nlog(1/ε)) oracle calls are necessary for small ε\varepsilonε, so the method's oracle complexity is optimal.

Setting

Let X⊂Rn\mathcal X\subset\mathbb R^nX⊂Rn be a convex body: a compact convex set with non-empty interior. Let f:X→[−B,B]f:\mathcal X\to[-B,B]f:X→[−B,B] be continuous and convex, and let x∗∈Xx^*\in\mathcal Xx∗∈X be a minimizer of fff on X\mathcal XX. A vector www is a subgradient of fff at x∈Xx\in\mathcal Xx∈X if f(x)−f(y)≤w⊤(x−y)f(x)-f(y)\le w^\top(x-y)f(x)−f(y)≤w⊤(x−y) for every y∈Xy\in\mathcal Xy∈X. The first order oracle returns, at a query point, some subgradient there; the zeroth order oracle returns the value of fff.

For a set S\mathcal SS of finite positive volume, its center of gravity is

c(S)=1vol(S)∫x∈Sx dx.c(\mathcal S)=\frac{1}{\mathrm{vol}(\mathcal S)}\int_{x\in\mathcal S}x\,dx .c(S)=vol(S)1​∫x∈S​xdx.

The center of gravity method sets S1=X\mathcal S_1=\mathcal XS1​=X and, for t≥1t\ge1t≥1, computes ct=c(St)c_t=c(\mathcal S_t)ct​=c(St​), queries the first order oracle at ctc_tct​ to obtain a subgradient wtw_twt​, and sets

St+1=St∩{x∈Rn:(x−ct)⊤wt≤0}.\mathcal S_{t+1}=\mathcal S_t\cap\{x\in\mathbb R^n:(x-c_t)^\top w_t\le0\}.St+1​=St​∩{x∈Rn:(x−ct​)⊤wt​≤0}.

After ttt steps it outputs xt∈argmin⁡1≤r≤tf(cr)x_t\in\operatorname{argmin}_{1\le r\le t}f(c_r)xt​∈argmin1≤r≤t​f(cr​), found with ttt calls to the zeroth order oracle.

The Lean development names these objects IsConvexBody, IsSubgradientOn, centroid and IsCenterOfGravityRun in the namespace ConvexOptAlg.CenterGravity.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.1 (p. 245)

For every run of the method and every t≥1t\ge1t≥1,

f(xt)−min⁡x∈Xf(x)≤2B(1−1e)t/n.f(x_t)-\min_{x\in\mathcal X}f(x)\le 2B\Big(1-\frac1e\Big)^{t/n}.f(xt​)−x∈Xmin​f(x)≤2B(1−e1​)t/n.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 2.1, pp. 246–247)

  1. Lemma 2.2 (Grünbaum). If K\mathcal KK is centered, ∫Kx dx=0\int_{\mathcal K}x\,dx=0∫K​xdx=0, then for every w≠0w\ne0w=0,
Vol(K∩{x:x⊤w≥0})≥1e Vol(K).\mathrm{Vol}\big(\mathcal K\cap\{x:x^\top w\ge0\}\big)\ge\tfrac1e\,\mathrm{Vol}(\mathcal K).Vol(K∩{x:x⊤w≥0})≥e1​Vol(K).
  1. (2.2). St∖St+1⊂{x∈X:(x−ct)⊤wt>0}⊂{x∈X:f(x)>f(ct)}\mathcal S_t\setminus\mathcal S_{t+1}\subset\{x\in\mathcal X:(x-c_t)^\top w_t>0\}\subset\{x\in\mathcal X:f(x)>f(c_t)\}St​∖St+1​⊂{x∈X:(x−ct​)⊤wt​>0}⊂{x∈X:f(x)>f(ct​)}, hence x∗∈Stx^*\in\mathcal S_tx∗∈St​ for every ttt.
  2. Volume decay. If ws≠0w_s\ne0ws​=0 for s≤ts\le ts≤t, then vol(St+1)≤(1−1/e)t vol(X)\mathrm{vol}(\mathcal S_{t+1})\le(1-1/e)^t\,\mathrm{vol}(\mathcal X)vol(St+1​)≤(1−1/e)tvol(X).
  3. Shrunk copies. For ε∈[0,1]\varepsilon\in[0,1]ε∈[0,1] and Xε={(1−ε)x∗+εx:x∈X}\mathcal X_\varepsilon=\{(1-\varepsilon)x^*+\varepsilon x: x\in\mathcal X\}Xε​={(1−ε)x∗+εx:x∈X}, vol(Xε)=εn vol(X)\mathrm{vol}(\mathcal X_\varepsilon)=\varepsilon^n\,\mathrm{vol}(\mathcal X)vol(Xε​)=εnvol(X).
  4. Values on shrunk copies. Every xε∈Xεx_\varepsilon\in\mathcal X_\varepsilonxε​∈Xε​ satisfies f(xε)≤f(x∗)+2εBf(x_\varepsilon)\le f(x^*)+2\varepsilon Bf(xε​)≤f(x∗)+2εB.

Significance

Theorem 2.1 is a linear rate whose number of queries to reach accuracy ε\varepsilonε, O(nlog⁡(2B/ε))O(n\log(2B/\varepsilon))O(nlog(2B/ε)), depends on the dimension only linearly and on the accuracy only logarithmically, and matches the Nemirovski–Yudin lower bound. It is the reference point against which the ellipsoid method (O(n2log⁡(1/ε))O(n^2\log(1/\varepsilon))O(n2log(1/ε)) queries) and Vaidya's method are measured, and the randomized center of gravity method of §6.7 of the book rests on the same analysis. Grünbaum's inequality is a basic fact of convex geometry with uses well beyond optimization, for instance in the analysis of query complexity and of approximate centroid computations by random walks.

On the formal side, the theorem has been proved since 1965 and the lemma since 1960; neither is known to have a machine-checked proof. A complete development adds to Mathlib-based libraries the center of gravity of a set, the volume of homothetic images in the form used here, Grünbaum's inequality, and a reusable predicate for cutting plane runs. The later missions of this series (the ellipsoid method in particular) reuse the shrunk-copy argument of milestones 4 and 5.

Difficulty

The steps (2.2), the shrunk-copy volume and the value bound are short. The volume decay and the final comparison are bookkeeping once one knows that each cut keeps the method's sets convex bodies with positive volume. The difficulty is Lemma 2.2. A half-space through the centroid need not split the volume evenly: for a cone the smaller side tends to 1/e1/e1/e of the volume as n→∞n\to\inftyn→∞, so no symmetry argument works, and the bound must hold uniformly in the dimension. The classical proofs rely on tools of convex geometry, such as volume comparisons between a body and a symmetrized body, that are not available in Lean in the needed form. A second source of work is that the method's sets are defined through centroids: it has to be shown that they remain convex bodies of positive volume, so that each centroid is the genuine center of gravity, and this fact is not available before the volume estimates are.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with Lebesgue measure volume; volumes are kept in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] in every statement. The function is a total map f : EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) → ℝ with ∣f∣≤B|f|\le B∣f∣≤B, continuity and convexity required on X\mathcal XX only; its values off X\mathcal XX are irrelevant. Subgradients are relative to X\mathcal XX (Definition 1.2). A run is a predicate on sequences indexed from 111; the oracle's choice of subgradient is free, and every theorem holds for all runs. The minimizer x∗x^*x∗ is a hypothesis, as in the book's standing notation; it exists here by compactness. The output xtx_txt​ is any argmin, so the goal bounds the minimum min⁡1≤r≤tf(cr)\min_{1\le r\le t}f(c_r)min1≤r≤t​f(cr​).

Added hypotheses, all disclosed in the statements: n≥1n\ge1n≥1 in the goal, because the exponent t/nt/nt/n is undefined for n=0n=0n=0; and in Lemma 2.2, that the centered set is a convex body, because in Lean the integral of a non-integrable function is 000, which would make every unbounded convex set "centered". The milestone on volume decay assumes ws≠0w_s\ne0ws​=0, which is the book's own reduction.

The center of gravity is defined with the real volume vol(S)\mathrm{vol}(\mathcal S)vol(S) and is meaningless when that volume is 000 or infinite. The run predicate does not assume the volumes are positive; that every set of a run is a convex body of positive volume is part of what has to be proved, and a formalization in which runs could degenerate to sets of zero volume, or in which the centroid is an arbitrary point, is not the book's method.

Contributions welcome: proofs of any item; a general Grünbaum inequality for convex sets of finite positive volume; lemmas on centroids (membership in the closed convex hull, translation behaviour) that later missions can reuse.

Selected references

  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(3–4):231–358, 2015. arXiv:1405.4980v2, §2.1. https://arxiv.org/abs/1405.4980
  • B. Grünbaum, Partitions of mass-distributions and of convex bodies by hyperplanes, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 10(4):1257–1261, 1960. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1960.10.1257
  • A. Yu. Levin, On an algorithm for the minimization of convex functions, Soviet Mathematics Doklady 6:286–290, 1965.
  • D. J. Newman, Location of the maximum on unimodal surfaces, Journal of the ACM 12(3):395–398, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1145/321281.321291
  • A. Nemirovski and D. Yudin, Problem Complexity and Method Efficiency in Optimization, Wiley, 1983.
9 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Power and Limitations of Affine Policies in Two-Stage Adaptive Optimization I: An Affine Policy Is Optimal When the Uncertainty Set Is a SimplexResearch Paper

Motivation

Two-stage adaptive optimization models decisions taken in two rounds: a first-stage decision xxx is fixed before an uncertain parameter is revealed, and a second-stage decision y(b)y(b)y(b) is chosen after the parameter bbb is observed, so that the second stage may depend on bbb arbitrarily. The objective is the worst case over an uncertainty set U\mathcal UU of possible parameters. Such models arise in robust network design, capacity planning and two-stage covering problems, and they generalize the two-stage robust combinatorial problems (set cover, facility location) studied by Dhamdhere, Goyal, Ravi and Singh.

Optimizing over all functions y(⋅)y(\cdot)y(⋅) is intractable in general: Bertsimas and Goyal note that the optimal second stage is piecewise linear in bbb with possibly exponentially many pieces (Bemporad, Borrelli and Morari, 2003). A standard remedy, introduced for robust linear programs by Ben-Tal, Goryashko, Guslitzer and Nemirovski (2004), restricts the second stage to affine policies (linear decision rules) y(b)=Pb+qy(b)=Pb+qy(b)=Pb+q; the best affine policy is computable by a single convex program and performs well empirically. The question is when this restriction loses nothing.

Timeline of the relevant results:

  • 2004. Ben-Tal, Goryashko, Guslitzer and Nemirovski introduce affinely adjustable robust counterparts and show that the best affine policy is tractable for many uncertainty sets (doi:10.1007/s10107-003-0454-y).
  • 2010. Bertsimas, Iancu and Parrilo prove that affine policies are optimal for a class of multistage robust problems with one-dimensional uncertainty per stage and box uncertainty sets (doi:10.1287/moor.1100.0444).
  • 2012. Bertsimas and Goyal, the source of this mission, prove that an affine policy is optimal for model (1) whenever U\mathcal UU is a simplex (Theorem 1), and show that this exactness breaks down for slightly larger sets (doi:10.1007/s10107-011-0444-4).

Setting

Let A∈Rm×n1A\in\mathbb R^{m\times n_1}A∈Rm×n1​, B∈Rm×n2B\in\mathbb R^{m\times n_2}B∈Rm×n2​, c∈R+n1c\in\mathbb R^{n_1}_+c∈R+n1​​ and d∈R+n2d\in\mathbb R^{n_2}_+d∈R+n2​​. The problem ΠAdapt(U)\Pi_{Adapt}(\mathcal U)ΠAdapt​(U) of model (1) is

zAdapt(U)=min⁡ cTx+max⁡b∈UdTy(b)s.t.Ax+By(b)≥b,  x≥0,  y(b)≥0∀b∈U,z_{Adapt}(\mathcal U)=\min\ c^Tx+\max_{b\in\mathcal U}d^Ty(b)\quad\text{s.t.}\quad Ax+By(b)\ge b,\ \ x\ge 0,\ \ y(b)\ge 0\quad\forall b\in\mathcal U,zAdapt​(U)=min cTx+b∈Umax​dTy(b)s.t.Ax+By(b)≥b,  x≥0,  y(b)≥0∀b∈U,

where inequalities between vectors are componentwise. A pair (x,y)(x,y)(x,y) satisfying the constraints is feasible; its worst-case cost is cTx+max⁡b∈UdTy(b)c^Tx+\max_{b\in\mathcal U}d^Ty(b)cTx+maxb∈U​dTy(b). A feasible pair is optimal when its worst-case cost equals zAdapt(U)z_{Adapt}(\mathcal U)zAdapt​(U), and an affine policy is a second stage of the form y(b)=Pb+qy(b)=Pb+qy(b)=Pb+q with P∈Rn2×mP\in\mathbb R^{n_2\times m}P∈Rn2​×m, q∈Rn2q\in\mathbb R^{n_2}q∈Rn2​, still required to be nonnegative on U\mathcal UU. The value zAff(U)z_{Aff}(\mathcal U)zAff​(U) is the same minimum restricted to affine policies.

A simplex in Rm\mathbb R^mRm is the convex hull

U=conv⁡(b1,…,bm+1)\mathcal U=\operatorname{conv}(b^1,\dots,b^{m+1})U=conv(b1,…,bm+1)

of m+1m+1m+1 affinely independent points, that is, points for which b1−bm+1,…,bm−bm+1b^1-b^{m+1},\dots,b^m-b^{m+1}b1−bm+1,…,bm−bm+1 are linearly independent. The proof works with the m×mm\times mm×m matrix Q=[(b1−bm+1)⋯(bm−bm+1)]Q=[(b^1-b^{m+1})\cdots(b^m-b^{m+1})]Q=[(b1−bm+1)⋯(bm−bm+1)], the matrix Y=[(y∗(b1)−y∗(bm+1))⋯(y∗(bm)−y∗(bm+1))]Y=[(y^*(b^1)-y^*(b^{m+1}))\cdots(y^*(b^m)-y^*(b^{m+1}))]Y=[(y∗(b1)−y∗(bm+1))⋯(y∗(bm)−y∗(bm+1))] of display (2), and the affine rule y~(b)=YQ−1(b−bm+1)+y∗(bm+1)\tilde y(b)=YQ^{-1}(b-b^{m+1})+y^*(b^{m+1})y~​(b)=YQ−1(b−bm+1)+y∗(bm+1). In Lean these are Qmat v, Ymat v g and interpolant v g, with vertices v : Fin (m+1) → Fin m → ℝ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

If U=conv⁡(b1,…,bm+1)\mathcal U=\operatorname{conv}(b^1,\dots,b^{m+1})U=conv(b1,…,bm+1) with affinely independent bj∈R+mb^j\in\mathbb R^m_+bj∈R+m​ and ΠAdapt(U)\Pi_{Adapt}(\mathcal U)ΠAdapt​(U) is feasible, then there exist x^\hat xx^, P∈Rn2×mP\in\mathbb R^{n_2\times m}P∈Rn2​×m and q∈Rn2q\in\mathbb R^{n_2}q∈Rn2​ such that

(x^, y^),y^(b)=Pb+q  (b∈U),(\hat x,\ \hat y),\qquad \hat y(b)=Pb+q\ \ (b\in\mathcal U),(x^, y^​),y^​(b)=Pb+q  (b∈U),

is an optimal solution of ΠAdapt(U)\Pi_{Adapt}(\mathcal U)ΠAdapt​(U), optimal among all (not only affine) two-stage solutions. In particular zAff(U)=zAdapt(U)z_{Aff}(\mathcal U)=z_{Adapt}(\mathcal U)zAff​(U)=zAdapt​(U).

Milestones

The proof of Theorem 1 has no numbered lemma; the milestones are its displayed steps, in attack order:

  1. QQQ is invertible (PDF p. 6).
  2. For b=∑jαjbjb=\sum_j\alpha_jb^jb=∑j​αj​bj with ∑jαj=1\sum_j\alpha_j=1∑j​αj​=1: Q−1(b−bm+1)=(α1,…,αm)TQ^{-1}(b-b^{m+1})=(\alpha_1,\dots,\alpha_m)^TQ−1(b−bm+1)=(α1​,…,αm​)T (PDF p. 6).
  3. y~(∑jαjbj)=∑jαj y∗(bj)\tilde y\big(\sum_j\alpha_jb^j\big)=\sum_j\alpha_j\,y^*(b^j)y~​(∑j​αj​bj)=∑j​αj​y∗(bj) (PDF pp. 6–7).
  4. Displays (3)–(5): for any feasible (x∗,y∗)(x^*,y^*)(x∗,y∗), the pair (x∗,y~)(x^*,\tilde y)(x∗,y~​) is feasible and every bound on the worst-case cost of (x∗,y∗)(x^*,y^*)(x∗,y∗) also bounds that of (x∗,y~)(x^*,\tilde y)(x∗,y~​) (PDF p. 7).

Significance

The result. Theorem 1 identifies a class of uncertainty sets on which the tractable affine restriction is exact, for every constraint matrix AAA and BBB and every nonnegative cost. It is the positive anchor of the paper: Sections 3 and 4 show that with m+3m+3m+3 extreme points the best affine policy can already be worse by a factor 2−δ2-\delta2−δ, and that on sets with exponentially many extreme points the gap can be Ω(m1/2−δ)\Omega(m^{1/2-\delta})Ω(m1/2−δ); Section 6 uses a dominating simplex, on which affine policies are exact, to build an O(m)O(\sqrt m)O(m​)-approximation for general U\mathcal UU. The theorem also says that on a simplex the whole adaptive problem reduces to m+1m+1m+1 scenario copies of a linear program.

Formalizing it. The result is proved on paper; no machine-checked version is known on Prove2Me. This mission produces the model (1) in Lean, the barycentric-coordinate identity for a simplex in matrix form, and a statement of optimality that asserts attainment of the minimum in (1), which the paper's proof takes for granted.

Difficulty

Two steps are not routine to formalize. First, the paper starts from "an optimal solution x∗,y∗(b)x^*,y^*(b)x∗,y∗(b)", that is, it assumes the minimum in (1) is attained. Over arbitrary functions y(⋅)y(\cdot)y(⋅) this is not automatic; on a simplex it follows because the problem reduces to a finite linear program on the vertices, whose optimum is attained, but Mathlib has no theory of linear-programming attainment, so this reduction has to be built. Second, the affine-independence step needs the passage from affine independence of m+1m+1m+1 points to invertibility of the m×mm\times mm×m matrix QQQ, and the identity Q−1(b−bm+1)=αQ^{-1}(b-b^{m+1})=\alphaQ−1(b−bm+1)=α requires the barycentric coordinates and the inverse matrix to be matched index by index. The naive idea of comparing zAffz_{Aff}zAff​ and zAdaptz_{Adapt}zAdapt​ as real infima does not prove the goal: equality of the two infima says nothing about the existence of an optimal solution.

Formalization scope

Vectors in Rm\mathbb R^mRm are Fin m → ℝ, with the componentwise order; matrices are Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ. The paper's indices start at 111, Lean's at 000: bjb^jbj is v (j-1) and bm+1b^{m+1}bm+1 is v (Fin.last m). The simplex is convexHull ℝ (Set.range v); it is compact, convex and, by affine independence, full-dimensional, so these standing assumptions of (1) are not stated separately. Nonnegativity of U\mathcal UU is the hypothesis that all m+1m+1m+1 vertices are nonnegative (the page writes j=1,…,mj=1,\dots,mj=1,…,m, a slip for m+1m+1m+1). Feasibility of (1) is a hypothesis, as the paper assumes. Optimality (IsOptimalAdapt) means: feasible, and every worst-case cost bound achieved by any feasible two-stage solution is achieved by this one. The values zAdaptz_{Adapt}zAdapt​ and zAffz_{Aff}zAff​ are infima of the sets of achievable bounds; they are provided for reference and the goal does not depend on them.

The goal must not be replaced by zAff(U)≤zAdapt(U)z_{Aff}(\mathcal U)\le z_{Adapt}(\mathcal U)zAff​(U)≤zAdapt​(U), by optimality among affine policies only, or by a version that assumes an optimal solution exists: each of these drops the content "there is an optimal solution and it is affine". The goal does not mention QQQ, YYY or the interpolant.

A complete development needs: linear-programming attainment for a finite system of linear inequalities with a cost bounded below (reusable well beyond this mission), the linear-algebra lemmas relating affine independence to an invertible edge matrix (reusable for barycentric coordinates in general), and the convex-hull representation of points of a simplex. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Bertsimas, V. Goyal, On the power and limitations of affine policies in two-stage adaptive optimization, Math. Program. Ser. A, 2012. doi:10.1007/s10107-011-0444-4
  • A. Ben-Tal, A. Goryashko, E. Guslitzer, A. Nemirovski, Adjustable robust solutions of uncertain linear programs, Math. Program. 99(2), 351–376, 2004. doi:10.1007/s10107-003-0454-y
  • D. Bertsimas, D. A. Iancu, P. A. Parrilo, Optimality of affine policies in multistage robust optimization, Math. Oper. Res. 35(2), 363–394, 2010. doi:10.1287/moor.1100.0444
  • A. Bemporad, F. Borrelli, M. Morari, Min–max control of constrained uncertain discrete-time linear systems, IEEE Trans. Autom. Control 48(9), 1600–1606, 2003. doi:10.1109/TAC.2003.816984
7 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Maximization of a Linear Function of Variables Subject to Linear Inequalities: Under Nondegeneracy the Simplex Technique Ends in Infeasibility, Unboundedness, or a Maximum Feasible SolutionResearch Paper

Motivation

Linear programming asks for the best value of a linear objective under linear constraints. In the form studied by George B. Dantzig in 1951, all variables are nonnegative and the constraints are equalities. The simplex technique moves between small sets of columns, seeking a feasible vector first and then improving its objective. Its basic promise is operational: a run should end with a valid answer, whether that answer is a maximum, infeasibility, or an objective that can grow without bound. Dantzig's chapter sets out both phases and the tests that distinguish these outcomes.

The formulation matters to readers of optimization because it separates the algebraic claim about a linear program from a particular rule for selecting the next column. The chapter permits any entering column satisfying the stated improvement test. This mission captures the correctness claim for every sequence of admissible choices under the chapter's nondegeneracy assumption, with one additional general-position condition needed for the Phase I argument.

Setting

Fix integers 1≤m≤n1\le m\le n1≤m≤n. Let P0∈RmP_0\in\mathbb R^mP0​∈Rm be a right-hand side, P1,…,Pn∈RmP_1,\ldots,P_n\in\mathbb R^mP1​,…,Pn​∈Rm be columns, and c1,…,cn∈Rc_1,\ldots,c_n\in\mathbb Rc1​,…,cn​∈R be objective coefficients. A feasible solution is a weight vector λ∈Rn\lambda\in\mathbb R^nλ∈Rn with λj≥0\lambda_j\ge0λj​≥0 and ∑jλjPj=P0\sum_j\lambda_jP_j=P_0∑j​λj​Pj​=P0​. Its objective value is z(λ)=∑jλjcjz(\lambda)=\sum_j\lambda_jc_jz(λ)=∑j​λj​cj​. It is maximum feasible when z(μ)≤z(λ)z(\mu)\le z(\lambda)z(μ)≤z(λ) for every feasible μ\muμ. Unboundedness means that feasible objective values exceed every real threshold.

Dantzig assumes nondegeneracy: every indexed selection of mmm points among P0,P1,…,PnP_0,P_1,\ldots,P_nP0​,P1​,…,Pn​ is linearly independent. A Phase II state uses exactly mmm basic columns BBB, each with a positive weight, and represents P0P_0P0​ with them. Every column has unique coordinates Pj=∑i∈BxijPiP_j=\sum_{i\in B}x_{ij}P_iPj​=∑i∈B​xij​Pi​, and zj=∑i∈Bxijciz_j=\sum_{i\in B}x_{ij}c_izj​=∑i∈B​xij​ci​ is the corresponding objective value. A column with cj>zjc_j>z_jcj​>zj​ can improve the objective. When some xij>0x_{ij}>0xij​>0, the step uses the smallest ratio λi/xij\lambda_i/x_{ij}λi​/xij​ over those positive coordinates and replaces a minimizing basic column.

A Phase I state begins from m−1m-1m−1 basic columns SSS and a fixed reference point GGG. Positive weights wiw_iwi​ and ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 satisfy G+ρP0=∑i∈SwiPiG+\rho P_0=\sum_{i\in S}w_iP_iG+ρP0​=∑i∈S​wi​Pi​. Write Pj=y0jP0+∑i∈SyijPiP_j=y_{0j}P_0+\sum_{i\in S}y_{ij}P_iPj​=y0j​P0​+∑i∈S​yij​Pi​. A column with y0j>0y_{0j}>0y0j​>0 either gives a new Phase I basis through the positive-ratio test or supplies the nonnegative weights in equation (39), which start Phase II.

Formalization targets

The goal is the correctness of the complete two-phase transition system. There is no infinite admissible run. Every state with no outgoing transition has one of three outcomes:

Phase I:y0j≤0 (∀j),no feasible solution;Phase II:∃j (cj>zj ∧ xij≤0 (∀i∈B)),∀M∈R ∃λ feasible:z(λ)>M;Phase II:cj≤zj (∀j),z(μ)≤z(λ) for every feasible μ.\begin{array}{ll} \text{Phase I:}& y_{0j}\le0\ (\forall j),\quad \text{no feasible solution};\\ \text{Phase II:}& \exists j\ (c_j>z_j\ \land\ x_{ij}\le0\ (\forall i\in B)),\quad \forall M\in\mathbb R\ \exists\lambda\text{ feasible}: z(\lambda)>M;\\ \text{Phase II:}& c_j\le z_j\ (\forall j),\quad z(\mu)\le z(\lambda)\text{ for every feasible }\mu. \end{array}Phase I:Phase II:Phase II:​y0j​≤0 (∀j),no feasible solution;∃j (cj​>zj​ ∧ xij​≤0 (∀i∈B)),∀M∈R ∃λ feasible:z(λ)>M;cj​≤zj​ (∀j),z(μ)≤z(λ) for every feasible μ.​

The five milestones follow the chapter's own statements: Theorem 3's infeasibility certificate, Section 2's termination and hand-off, Theorem 1's improving family and two cases, Section 1's termination alternatives, and Theorem 2's optimality test. The goal includes the hand-off from the first phase to the second; the milestones make each outcome separately auditable.

Significance

The result gives a complete outcome guarantee for the chapter's procedure under its stated nondegeneracy regime. A terminal basis satisfying cj≤zjc_j\le z_jcj​≤zj​ is certified optimal against every feasible solution, not just against nearby bases. The other terminal tests certify properties of the original problem: nonexistence of feasible weights or arbitrarily large feasible objective values. This is the distinction needed to use the procedure as an algorithm for an LP rather than merely a local improvement rule.

The chapter's Theorems A and B assert existence of a basic feasible solution, and existence of a basic optimal one when the objective is bounded above. A proved platform theorem on basic optimal solutions covers these structural results after changing minimization cost qqq to −c-c−c; it is included by reference. Existing simplex results in the platform's minimization convention do not state Dantzig's Phase I reference-point process or his xijx_{ij}xij​ and zjz_jzj​ tests. Formalizing this mission adds that two-phase interface and a machine-checkable statement of its outcomes.

Difficulty

An improving column alone does not say whether another basis exists. In Phase II, the signs of its basis coordinates determine whether the positive weights meet a finite ratio limit or instead continue along an unbounded feasible family. In Phase I, the analogous limit must preserve strictly positive weights on exactly m−1m-1m−1 columns. The printed argument says that a coefficient vanishes at the limit, but does not exclude two coefficients vanishing together. That gap matters because the next state in the paper's recurrence must again have strictly positive basic weights. The mission states a general-position condition on GGG that rules out this simultaneous-vanishing case. It is an explicit addition to the printed assumptions and should be reviewed as such.

Formalization scope

Lean uses Fin n → (Fin m → ℝ) for the columns, Fin m → ℝ for P0P_0P0​ and GGG, Fin n → ℝ for weights and costs, and finite sets for bases. Its zero-based Fin n labels correspond to the paper's 1,…,n1,\ldots,n1,…,n. Each state carries its basis cardinality, independence, coordinate equations, and strictly positive basic weights. This keeps the coordinate functions defined on genuine bases and prevents a zero-weight intermediate state from counting as a valid pivot. The transition relation records every admissible entering column and minimizing leaving index; the pivot-selection heuristics (20) and (21) are outside the claim.

The phrases “upper bound of zzz is infinite” and “process terminates” are read as, respectively, objective values above every real threshold on the original feasible set and absence of an infinite sequence of admissible steps. “A feasible solution has been obtained” is the explicit vector of equation (39), not an unnamed existence assertion. Maximum feasible means feasible plus comparison with every feasible vector, avoiding a real supremum's empty-set default. The dimensions 1≤m≤n1\le m\le n1≤m≤n make both kinds of basis possible and prevent a vacuous nondegeneracy condition. General position asks every family containing GGG, P0P_0P0​, and m−2m-2m−2 distinct PjP_jPj​ to be independent. The paper does not write this condition, so its inclusion is a substantive qualification of the target.

The printed indices in (30), (45), and a sentence following (18) do not match their defining ranges. The Lean statements use all nnn columns for jjj and the current m−1m-1m−1 Phase I columns for iii. The indices in (17) and (45) also carry the entering conditions cj>zjc_j>z_jcj​>zj​ and y0j>0y_{0j}>0y0j​>0, respectively. These corrections preserve the paper's described procedure and prevent a terminal test from becoming trivial through a basic column. Contributions may address the finite-state termination argument, the ratio-test lemmas, coordinate uniqueness, and the translation from terminal signs to the three global LP outcomes. The operation counts and geometric interpretation on the last pages are outside the formalization.

Selected references

  • George B. Dantzig, “Maximization of a Linear Function of Variables Subject to Linear Inequalities,” in T. C. Koopmans (ed.), Activity Analysis of Production and Allocation, Wiley, 1951, Chapter XXI, pp. 339–347. Book catalog search.
  • Hartmann_Psi, “A bounded feasible standard-form LP attains its minimum at a basic feasible solution,” Prove2Me, proved platform theorem. Theorem record.
  • Shuze Chen, “Finite termination of the simplex method under nondegeneracy,” Prove2Me, proved platform theorem in a minimization convention. Theorem record.
9 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Variance-based Regularization with Convex Objectives III: Localized-Rademacher Risk Bounds for the Robust MinimizerResearch Paper

Why variance-regularized risk bounds

In statistical learning, one picks a function fff from a class F\mathcal FF to make the population risk E[f]\mathbb E[f]E[f] small, with access only to an i.i.d. sample x1,…,xnx_1,\dots,x_nx1​,…,xn​ from an unknown distribution PPP. Empirical risk minimization replaces E[f]\mathbb E[f]E[f] by the empirical mean EP^n[f]\mathbb E_{\widehat P_n}[f]EPn​​[f], and its classical guarantees decay like 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​ regardless of how concentrated fff is. Bernstein-type inequalities show that the deviation of EP^n[f]\mathbb E_{\widehat P_n}[f]EPn​​[f] from E[f]\mathbb E[f]E[f] scales with the standard deviation of fff, so a procedure that minimizes "empirical risk plus a standard-deviation penalty" can, in principle, achieve faster rates when the variance at the optimum is small (Maurer and Pontil, 2009). The penalized objective is non-convex even when every fff is convex in its parameters, which makes it hard to optimize.

J. C. Duchi and H. Namkoong (arXiv:1610.02581v3, 2017) replace the penalty by a distributionally robust objective: the worst-case risk over all reweightings of the sample within a χ2\chi^2χ2-divergence ball. This objective is convex whenever the losses are, and (Theorem 1 of the paper) it equals the empirical mean plus a standard-deviation penalty up to an error of order 1/n1/n1/n. This mission formalizes the paper's guarantee for the minimizer of that robust objective in terms of localized Rademacher complexities (Section 3.2, Theorem 4), the sharpest of the paper's three generalization analyses. It is the third of four missions on the paper.

Setting

Let PPP be a probability measure on a measurable space X\mathcal XX and x1,…,xnx_1,\dots,x_nx1​,…,xn​, n≥1n\ge1n≥1, an i.i.d. sample from PPP with empirical distribution P^n\widehat P_nPn​. Let M≥1M\ge1M≥1 and let F\mathcal FF be a collection of measurable functions f:X→[0,M]f:\mathcal X\to[0,M]f:X→[0,M] (losses).

  • The χ2\chi^2χ2 ball of radius ρ≥0\rho\ge0ρ≥0 is the set Pn\mathcal P_nPn​ of weight vectors p∈Rnp\in\mathbb R^np∈Rn with pi≥0p_i\ge0pi​≥0, ∑ipi=1\sum_ip_i=1∑i​pi​=1 and 12∑i(npi−1)2≤ρ\frac12\sum_i(np_i-1)^2\le\rho21​∑i​(npi​−1)2≤ρ; equivalently, the distributions PPP on the sample with Dϕ(P∥P^n)≤ρ/nD_\phi(P\|\widehat P_n)\le\rho/nDϕ​(P∥Pn​)≤ρ/n for ϕ(t)=12(t−1)2\phi(t)=\frac12(t-1)^2ϕ(t)=21​(t−1)2.
  • The robust risk of fff is sup⁡P: Dϕ(P∥P^n)≤ρ/nEP[f]=sup⁡p∈Pn∑ipif(xi)\sup_{P:\,D_\phi(P\|\widehat P_n)\le\rho/n}\mathbb E_P[f]=\sup_{p\in\mathcal P_n}\sum_ip_if(x_i)supP:Dϕ​(P∥Pn​)≤ρ/n​EP​[f]=supp∈Pn​​∑i​pi​f(xi​), and a robust minimizer f^\widehat ff​ minimizes it over F\mathcal FF.
  • The empirical Rademacher complexity is Rn(F)=Eε[sup⁡f∈F1n∑iεif(xi)]\mathfrak R_n(\mathcal F)=\mathbb E_\varepsilon\big[\sup_{f\in\mathcal F}\frac1n\sum_i\varepsilon_if(x_i)\big]Rn​(F)=Eε​[supf∈F​n1​∑i​εi​f(xi​)] with i.i.d. uniform signs εi∈{−1,1}\varepsilon_i\in\{-1,1\}εi​∈{−1,1}, and E[Rn(F)]\mathbb E[\mathfrak R_n(\mathcal F)]E[Rn​(F)] averages it over the sample.
  • A function ψ:R+→R+\psi:\mathbb R_+\to\mathbb R_+ψ:R+​→R+​ is sub-root if it is nonnegative, nondecreasing, and r↦ψ(r)/rr\mapsto\psi(r)/\sqrt rr↦ψ(r)/r​ is nonincreasing on r>0r>0r>0.
  • The localization inequality (20) asks that, for all r≥0r\ge0r≥0,
ψn(r) ≥ E[Rn({cf:f∈F, c∈[0,1], E[c2f2]≤r})],\psi_n(r)\ \ge\ \mathbb E\big[\mathfrak R_n(\{cf : f\in\mathcal F,\ c\in[0,1],\ \mathbb E[c^2f^2]\le r\})\big],ψn​(r) ≥ E[Rn​({cf:f∈F, c∈[0,1], E[c2f2]≤r})],

with ψn\psi_nψn​ sub-root, and rn⋆>0r_n^\star>0rn⋆​>0 is a point with rn⋆≥ψn(rn⋆)r_n^\star\ge\psi_n(r_n^\star)rn⋆​≥ψn​(rn⋆​).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4, inequality (23), as its proof establishes it

Let 0<t<n0<t<n0<t<n and let ρ\rhoρ satisfy (21): ρn≥8(45Mn(t+log⁡⌈log⁡nt⌉)+18rn⋆)\frac\rho n\ge8\big(\frac{45M}n\big(t+\log\lceil\log\frac nt\rceil\big)+18r_n^\star\big)nρ​≥8(n45M​(t+log⌈logtn​⌉)+18rn⋆​). With probability at least 1−4e−t1-4e^{-t}1−4e−t, every robust minimizer f^\widehat ff​ satisfies

E[f^] ≤ (1+22ρn)inf⁡f∈F(E[f]+182ρ45nVar(f))+(14+62ρn)M(3ρ+t)n.\mathbb E[\widehat f]\ \le\ \Big(1+2\sqrt{\tfrac{2\rho}n}\Big)\inf_{f\in\mathcal F}\Big(\mathbb E[f]+\sqrt{\tfrac{182\rho}{45n}\mathrm{Var}(f)}\Big)+\Big(14+6\sqrt{\tfrac{2\rho}n}\Big)\frac{M(3\rho+t)}n .E[f​] ≤ (1+2n2ρ​​)f∈Finf​(E[f]+45n182ρ​Var(f)​)+(14+6n2ρ​​)nM(3ρ+t)​.

Milestones

In attack order: Bousquet's form of Talagrand's inequality (Lemma B.2); the elementary root bound (Lemma D.4); the contraction principle (Lemma D.5, a published theorem); the uniform Bernstein inequality with Rademacher complexity (Lemma D.1); its localized version in terms of rn⋆r_n^\starrn⋆​ (Lemma D.2); localized second-moment bounds (Lemma D.3); the deterministic expansion (10) of Theorem 1,

(2ρnsn2−2Mρn)+≤sup⁡PEP[Z]−EP^n[Z]≤2ρnsn2;\Big(\sqrt{\tfrac{2\rho}n s_n^2}-\tfrac{2M\rho}n\Big)_+\le\sup_{P}\mathbb E_P[Z]-\mathbb E_{\widehat P_n}[Z]\le\sqrt{\tfrac{2\rho}ns_n^2};(n2ρ​sn2​​−n2Mρ​)+​≤Psup​EP​[Z]−EPn​​[Z]≤n2ρ​sn2​​;

and the uniform bound (22): with probability at least 1−2e−t1-2e^{-t}1−2e−t, for all f∈Ff\in\mathcal Ff∈F,

E[f]≤(1+22ρn)sup⁡P: Dϕ(P∥P^n)≤ρ/nEP[f]+(13+42ρn)Mρn.\mathbb E[f]\le\Big(1+2\sqrt{\tfrac{2\rho}n}\Big)\sup_{P:\,D_\phi(P\|\widehat P_n)\le\rho/n}\mathbb E_P[f]+\Big(13+4\sqrt{\tfrac{2\rho}n}\Big)\frac{M\rho}n .E[f]≤(1+2n2ρ​​)P:Dϕ​(P∥Pn​)≤ρ/nsup​EP​[f]+(13+4n2ρ​​)nMρ​.

Significance

The bound (23) says that the robust minimizer competes with the best trade-off between risk and standard deviation in the class, and that the complexity of the class enters only through the fixed point rn⋆r_n^\starrn⋆​ of a localized complexity bound. For bounded VC classes rn⋆r_n^\starrn⋆​ is of order dlog⁡(n/d)n\frac{d\log(n/d)}nndlog(n/d)​ (Bartlett, Bousquet and Mendelson, 2005, Corollary 3.7), so when the optimal function has small variance the excess risk is of order ρ/n\rho/nρ/n, faster than the 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​ of uniform covering arguments; and localized complexities apply to classes, such as balls of reproducing kernel Hilbert spaces, whose covering numbers are too large for the covering-number analysis of the paper's Theorem 3 (mission II of this series).

The paper's result is proved, not open. No part of it, and none of the localized-complexity machinery of Bartlett, Bousquet and Mendelson, is formalized in Lean or Mathlib to our knowledge. The mission produces a checked version of the theorem with every constant explicit and, along the way, the localization lemmas D.1–D.3, which are reusable for any localized-complexity analysis. Reading the proof also exposed three arithmetic slips in the printed statements; the mission states what the proof establishes (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

The obvious route applies a uniform concentration inequality to F\mathcal FF and then a Bernstein bound to each fff. Talagrand's inequality applied to the whole class gives a deviation governed by the largest variance in the class and by the global complexity E[Rn(F)]\mathbb E[\mathfrak R_n(\mathcal F)]E[Rn​(F)], which yields only 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​ rates. Obtaining a deviation that scales with each function's own second moment requires peeling the class into shells of comparable second moment and a fixed-point argument on the sub-root bound, with a union bound whose cost appears as log⁡⌈log⁡nt⌉\log\lceil\log\frac nt\rceillog⌈logtn​⌉. The two directions of the localized inequalities (population to sample, and sample to population for second moments) must then be combined with the deterministic expansion (10) while keeping the constants explicit. A further subtlety is the self-normalized rescaling f↦r/(E[f2]∨r) ff\mapsto\sqrt{r/(\mathbb E[f^2]\vee r)}\,ff↦r/(E[f2]∨r)​f, which differs from the variance normalization of Bartlett et al. and is what makes the bound compatible with the robust objective.

Formalization scope

Lean conventions. The sample is the coordinate map of the product measure PnP^nPn on Fin n → X. Distributions on the sample are weight vectors in the χ2\chi^2χ2 ball; the robust risk is the real supremum over that ball (attained, since the ball is nonempty and compact for n≥1n\ge1n≥1, ρ≥0\rho\ge0ρ≥0). Population means and variances are ∫ x, f x ∂P and ProbabilityTheory.variance f P for measurable bounded fff; empirical means and variances are normalized by 1/n1/n1/n. The empirical Rademacher complexity is the published UnderstandingML_Rademacher definition evaluated on {(f(x1),…,f(xn))}\{(f(x_1),\dots,f(x_n))\}{(f(x1​),…,f(xn​))}. Its expectation is a Bochner integral, and every hypothesis that bounds it also asserts that the integrand is integrable: otherwise the integral is 000, (20) would hold for free, and the theorem would be false. Probability bounds are stated for the failure event under PnP^nPn (an outer measure when the event is not measurable). The goal speaks about every minimizer of the robust risk, so it is not vacuous when the set of minimizers is empty. The condition rn⋆>0r_n^\star>0rn⋆​>0 is part of the page's "root" (and the proof divides by rn⋆\sqrt{r_n^\star}rn⋆​​); with rn⋆=0r_n^\star=0rn⋆​=0 allowed, ψ(r)=r\psi(r)=\sqrt rψ(r)=r​ would remove the complexity term from (21). The condition t<nt<nt<n makes log⁡⌈log⁡nt⌉\log\lceil\log\frac nt\rceillog⌈logtn​⌉ defined.

Corrections of printed statements, each recorded in the item's docstring and Formalization Note (the milestone texts stay verbatim):

  • (22) is stated with probability 1−2e−t1-2e^{-t}1−2e−t; the paper prints 1−e−t1-e^{-t}1−e−t, and its proof (p. 41) concludes 1−2e−t1-2e^{-t}1−2e−t.
  • (23) is stated with probability 1−4e−t1-4e^{-t}1−4e−t (printed 1−3e−t1-3e^{-t}1−3e−t; the proof adds two fixed-fff events to the two of (22)) and with 182ρ45n\frac{182\rho}{45n}45n182ρ​ (printed 91ρ45n\frac{91\rho}{45n}45n91ρ​; the proof's step ρ+t≤91ρ/45\sqrt\rho+\sqrt t\le\sqrt{91\rho/45}ρ​+t​≤91ρ/45​ multiplies 2Var(f)/n\sqrt{2\mathrm{Var}(f)/n}2Var(f)/n​).
  • Lemma D.3 is stated with the additive term 72M2(1+η)rn⋆+(4(1+η)+143)M2tn72M^2(1+\eta)r_n^\star+(4(1+\eta)+\frac{14}3)\frac{M^2t}n72M2(1+η)rn⋆​+(4(1+η)+314​)nM2t​ and, in the reversed direction, the coefficient 1+11+η1+\frac1{1+\eta}1+1+η1​, as its proof yields (printed: Mtn(4+73M)\frac{Mt}n(4+\frac73M)nMt​(4+37​M) and 1+η1+η1+\frac\eta{1+\eta}1+1+ηη​), under Theorem 4's standing hypothesis M≥1M\ge1M≥1.
  • Lemma D.5 is linked to the published contraction lemma UnderstandingML.contraction_lemma, which states it at a fixed sample for nonempty bounded classes and allows a different Lipschitz map per coordinate.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones in any order; Lemma B.2 (Bousquet's inequality) is the deepest single ingredient and is reusable well beyond this mission, as are the peeling Lemma D.1 and the sub-root fixed-point Lemma D.2.

Selected references

  • J. C. Duchi and H. Namkoong, Variance-based regularization with convex objectives, arXiv:1610.02581v3, 2017. https://arxiv.org/abs/1610.02581
  • P. L. Bartlett, O. Bousquet and S. Mendelson, Local Rademacher complexities, Annals of Statistics 33(4), 2005. https://doi.org/10.1214/009053605000000282
  • O. Bousquet, A Bennett concentration inequality and its application to suprema of empirical processes, Comptes Rendus Mathématique 334(6), 2002. https://doi.org/10.1016/S1631-073X(02)02292-6
  • A. Maurer and M. Pontil, Empirical Bernstein bounds and sample variance penalization, COLT 2009. https://arxiv.org/abs/0907.3740
  • M. Ledoux and M. Talagrand, Probability in Banach Spaces, Springer, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-20212-4
14 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsGraph TheoryOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Maximal Flow Through a Network I: The Minimal Cut Theorem — the Maximal Flow Value Equals the Minimum Value of a Disconnecting SetResearch Paper

Motivation

The question behind this mission was posed by T. E. Harris to L. R. Ford, Jr. and D. R. Fulkerson at RAND, in the setting of rail transport: given a rail network linking two cities, with a capacity on every link, find the largest steady flow from one city to the other. Ford and Fulkerson's answer, the minimal cut theorem, published in the Canadian Journal of Mathematics in 1956 (DOI 10.4153/CJM-1956-045-5), says that the obvious upper bound, the total capacity of a set of links whose removal separates the two cities, is always achieved by some flow.

The theorem became the starting point of network flow theory, and through it of a large part of combinatorial optimization and operations research: transportation, assignment, scheduling and network reliability problems are routinely reduced to it.

Timeline.

  • 1927: K. Menger proves that the minimum number of vertices separating two vertex sets of a graph equals the maximum number of disjoint paths joining them (Fund. Math. 10), the unit-capacity ancestor of the theorem.
  • 1955: Harris and Ross study the Soviet rail network as a capacity problem in a RAND report; Harris formulates the maximal flow problem (Schrijver's historical account: Math. Program. 91, 2002).
  • 1956: Ford and Fulkerson publish the minimal cut theorem for undirected networks, with a non-constructive proof based on maximal flows (this paper). Independently, Elias, Feinstein and Shannon state and prove the max-flow min-cut theorem for directed networks (IRE Trans. Inf. Theory 2, 1956), and Dantzig and Fulkerson obtain it from linear programming duality.
  • 1956–1962: Ford and Fulkerson's labelling (augmenting path) algorithm, collected in Flows in Networks (Princeton, 1962).
  • 1972: Edmonds and Karp give polynomial bounds for augmenting-path methods (J. ACM 19).

Setting

A network NNN consists of a finite set of vertices VVV, a finite set of arcs EEE, two distinct vertices, the source aaa and the sink bbb, and a positive capacity c(e)>0c(e)>0c(e)>0 on every arc. Each arc eee has two distinct end vertices; arcs are undirected, and several arcs may join the same pair of vertices.

A chain joining uuu and www is a set of distinct arcs that can be arranged as α1(v0v1),α2(v1v2),…,αm(vm−1vm)\alpha_1(v_0v_1),\alpha_2(v_1v_2),\dots,\alpha_m(v_{m-1}v_m)α1​(v0​v1​),α2​(v1​v2​),…,αm​(vm−1​vm​) with v0=uv_0=uv0​=u, vm=wv_m=wvm​=w and the vertices v0,…,vmv_0,\dots,v_mv0​,…,vm​ pairwise distinct; each arc may be traversed in either direction. The null chain (m=0m=0m=0) joins uuu to itself.

A flow fff assigns a number f(C)≥0f(C)\ge 0f(C)≥0 to each chain CCC joining aaa and bbb (and 000 to every other set of arcs) such that the load ℓf(e)=∑C∋ef(C)\ell_f(e)=\sum_{C\ni e}f(C)ℓf​(e)=∑C∋e​f(C) satisfies ℓf(e)≤c(e)\ell_f(e)\le c(e)ℓf​(e)≤c(e) for every arc. Its value is val(f)=∑Cf(C)\mathrm{val}(f)=\sum_C f(C)val(f)=∑C​f(C). An arc is saturated by fff if ℓf(e)=c(e)\ell_f(e)=c(e)ℓf​(e)=c(e). A maximal flow is a flow of largest value.

A set DDD of arcs is a disconnecting set if every chain joining aaa and bbb contains an arc of DDD; its value is v(D)=∑e∈Dc(e)v(D)=\sum_{e\in D}c(e)v(D)=∑e∈D​c(e). A cut is a disconnecting set no proper subset of which is disconnecting.

The proof introduces two further objects: the set SSS of arcs saturated by every maximal flow, and the set L⊆SL\subseteq SL⊆S of left arcs, those arcs of SSS whose left vertex (the end vertex met first by a positive chain flow of a maximal flow, travelling from aaa) can be reached from aaa by a chain with no arc saturated by some maximal flow.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (Minimal cut theorem), p. 400

∃ m∈R:m=max⁡f flowval(f)=min⁡D disconnectingv(D),\exists\, m\in\mathbb R:\quad m=\max_{f\ \text{flow}}\mathrm{val}(f)=\min_{D\ \text{disconnecting}}v(D),∃m∈R:m=f flowmax​val(f)=D disconnectingmin​v(D),

with both the maximum and the minimum attained. The statement mentions only flows and disconnecting sets, not the proof objects SSS and LLL.

Milestones, in the order of the paper's proof

  1. A maximal flow exists, and the set of maximal flows is convex (p. 400).
  2. Lemma 1: SSS is a disconnecting set (p. 400).
  3. Every arc of SSS receives the same orientation from all positive chain flows of all maximal flows: its left vertex is unique (pp. 400–401).
  4. Lemma 2: LLL is a disconnecting set (p. 401).
  5. Lemma 3: no positive chain flow of a maximal flow contains more than one arc of LLL (p. 401).
  6. val(f)≤v(D)\mathrm{val}(f)\le v(D)val(f)≤v(D) for every flow fff and every disconnecting set DDD (p. 402).
  7. LLL is a cut of minimal value, and every maximal flow has value v(L)v(L)v(L) (p. 402).

Two further statements of the paper are included as items without being milestones: the remark that a disconnecting set of minimal value is a cut (p. 400), and the Corollary (p. 402): if a set AAA of arcs meets every cut in exactly one arc, adding kkk to the capacity of each arc of AAA raises the maximal flow value by kkk.

Significance

The minimal cut theorem turns a maximization over flows into a minimization over finite sets of arcs, so an optimal flow comes with a short certificate of optimality. It implies Menger's theorem (unit capacities), and through it König's theorem on bipartite matchings and Hall's marriage theorem. The Corollary is the tool behind the paper's own computing procedure for source–sink planar networks (§2, formalized in a companion mission).

The theorem is classical and proved. What this mission adds is a machine-checked proof of the paper's own formulation: undirected arcs, parallel arcs, flows decomposed along chains (path flows, with no circulations), and the minimum taken over arc sets meeting every chain, together with the proof's intermediate claims. Max-flow min-cut theorems already on the platform (Applied Combinatorics VIII, AppliedComb.Flows.max_flow_min_cut; Introduction to Linear Optimization X, LinearOptimization.max_flow_min_cut) concern directed networks with edge flows obeying conservation and cuts given by vertex sets. They are related results, not this statement, and connecting the two models is itself welcome work.

Difficulty

Weak duality (milestone 6) is immediate; the content is the reverse inequality. The obvious first step, taking a maximal flow and observing that its saturated arcs separate aaa from bbb, does not finish the proof: a positive chain flow may pass through several saturated arcs, so the total capacity of the saturated arcs can exceed the flow value. One has to single out a disconnecting subset that every positive chain flow crosses exactly once, and there is no canonical choice from a single flow. The paper's sets SSS and LLL are defined from all maximal flows at once, and the work consists in showing that these sets are well behaved. The orientation claim in particular needs an exchange argument on two chains that cross at an arc, where the recombined arc sequences may revisit vertices and must be reduced to chains. In a formal development this "a walk contains a chain" step and the averaging of maximal flows over finitely many chains are the main bookkeeping costs.

Formalization scope

  • A network is a structure on a vertex type V and an arc type E, both Fintype with decidable equality, with end-vertex maps tail, head (labels only, no direction), tail e ≠ head e, a source and a sink with source ≠ sink, and capacities cap : E → ℝ with 0 < cap e. These are the paper's standing assumptions; there are no others in §1. In particular, no planarity is assumed and an arc may join aaa and bbb directly.
  • A chain is a Finset E that is the arc set of some arrangement (list of arcs, list of pairwise distinct vertices, each arc joining consecutive vertices in either order).
  • A flow is a function f : Finset E → ℝ, non-negative, zero off the chains joining source and sink, with every arc load at most the capacity. A collection of chain flows that lists a chain twice merges into this form without changing the value or any load.
  • "Maximal" means of maximum value. The goal is stated with IsGreatest and IsLeast on the sets of flow values and of values of disconnecting sets, so no supremum of a real set appears and both extrema must be attained.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: chains must be self-avoiding and must join the source and the sink, the disconnecting condition quantifies over exactly these chains, and the minimum ranges over all disconnecting sets rather than over a family chosen to match a given flow.
  • Needed infrastructure: finite sums over Finset (Finset E), convexity in Finset E → ℝ, compactness of the flow polytope (for existence), and lemmas on lists (extracting a chain from a walk). The walk-to-chain lemma and weak duality are reusable for the companion mission and for any path-flow model.

Selected references

  • L. R. Ford, Jr. and D. R. Fulkerson, Maximal Flow Through a Network, Canadian Journal of Mathematics 8 (1956), 399–404. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1956-045-5
  • P. Elias, A. Feinstein and C. E. Shannon, A note on the maximum flow through a network, IRE Transactions on Information Theory 2 (1956), 117–119. https://doi.org/10.1109/TIT.1956.1056816
  • K. Menger, Zur allgemeinen Kurventheorie, Fundamenta Mathematicae 10 (1927), 96–115. https://doi.org/10.4064/fm-10-1-96-115
  • L. R. Ford, Jr. and D. R. Fulkerson, Flows in Networks, Princeton University Press, 1962.
  • J. Edmonds and R. M. Karp, Theoretical improvements in algorithmic efficiency for network flow problems, Journal of the ACM 19 (1972), 248–264. https://doi.org/10.1145/321694.321699
  • A. Schrijver, On the history of the transportation and maximum flow problems, Mathematical Programming 91 (2002), 437–445. https://doi.org/10.1007/s101070100259
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsGraph TheoryLinear Optimization+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Maximum Matching and a Polyhedron With 0,1-Vertices: The Vertices of the Matching Polyhedron Are Exactly the Matching VectorsResearch Paper

Motivation

A matching in a graph is a set of edges no two of which share a node. Given a real weight on every edge, the maximum-weight matching problem asks for a matching of largest total weight. It is one of the basic problems of combinatorial optimization: assignment, pairing and scheduling problems reduce to it, and it is the standard example of a combinatorial problem that is solvable in polynomial time although it is not obviously a linear program.

For bipartite graphs the problem is a linear program in disguise: the polytope cut out by nonnegativity and the node-degree inequalities has only 0–1 vertices (the Birkhoff–von Neumann theorem in the square case; Mathlib has it as extremePoints_doublyStochastic). For general graphs this fails already on a triangle, where the vector with every coordinate 1/21/21/2 satisfies all degree inequalities but is not a combination of matchings. Edmonds' 1965 paper (DOI 10.6028/jres.069b.013) adds one family of inequalities, one for each odd set of nodes, and proves that the resulting polyhedron has exactly the matching vectors as its vertices. The companion paper Paths, trees, and flowers gives the cardinality algorithm on which the weighted algorithm of §7 is built.

Timeline:

  • 1931: König and Egerváry prove the min–max theorems for bipartite matching; 1946: Birkhoff shows that the doubly stochastic matrices are the convex hull of the permutation matrices (the bipartite perfect-matching polytope).
  • 1947: Tutte characterizes graphs with a perfect matching.
  • 1965: Edmonds, Paths, trees, and flowers: the blossom algorithm for maximum-cardinality matching.
  • 1965: Edmonds, this paper: Theorem (P) (the matching polyhedron) and Theorem (M) (blossom-shrinking optimality certificates), with a weighted matching algorithm.

Setting

Let GGG be a finite graph with node set VVV and edge set EEE; each edge meets two different nodes, its ends. Real variables xex_exe​ correspond to the edges e∈Ee\in Ee∈E. The polyhedron C⊆REC\subseteq\mathbb R^EC⊆RE is the set of vectors xxx satisfying

  1. xe≥0x_e\ge 0xe​≥0 for every edge eee;
  2. ∑e meets vxe≤1\sum_{e \text{ meets } v} x_e\le 1∑e meets v​xe​≤1 for every node vvv;
  3. ∑e has both ends in Sxe≤r\sum_{e \text{ has both ends in } S} x_e\le r∑e has both ends in S​xe​≤r for every set SSS of 2r+12r+12r+1 nodes, rrr a strictly positive integer.

The matching vectors PPP are the vectors with every component 000 or 111 that satisfy (2); they are the incidence vectors of matchings. For edge weights c∈REc\in\mathbb R^Ec∈RE, the linear form (4) is W(c,x)=∑ecexeW(c,x)=\sum_e c_e x_eW(c,x)=∑e​ce​xe​.

The dual program has a variable yvy_vyv​ for each node and zSz_SzS​ for each odd set SSS (∣S∣=2rS+1|S|=2r_S+1∣S∣=2rS​+1, rS≥1r_S\ge1rS​≥1). Its objective is (5) U(y,z)=∑vyv+∑SrSzSU(y,z)=\sum_v y_v+\sum_S r_S z_SU(y,z)=∑v​yv​+∑S​rS​zS​, subject to (6) y,z≥0y,z\ge0y,z≥0 and (7) yv1+yv2+∑S∋v1,v2zS≥cey_{v_1}+y_{v_2}+\sum_{S\ni v_1,v_2}z_S\ge c_eyv1​​+yv2​​+∑S∋v1​,v2​​zS​≥ce​ for every edge eee with ends v1,v2v_1,v_2v1​,v2​. For a matching MMM, conditions (8)–(10) are the complementary slackness conditions: yv=0y_v=0yv​=0 at nodes not covered by MMM, equality in (7) on MMM, and every odd set with zS>0z_S>0zS​>0 contains exactly rSr_SrS​ edges of MMM.

A blossom sequence {Gi}i=0n\{G_i\}_{i=0}^n{Gi​}i=0n​ (Theorem (M)) starts from G0=GG_0=GG0​=G with matching M0=MM_0=MM0​=M and repeatedly shrinks an odd circuit BiB_iBi​ (a blossom, 2ai+12a_i+12ai​+1 edges of which aia_iai​ are matched) to a single node, carrying node weights w(vi)w(v^i)w(vi) and edge weights w(ei)w(e^i)w(ei) that obey conditions (a)–(k) of p. 127.

In the Lean development these are Graph, IsMatching, incidence, matchingPolyhedron (CCC), matchingVectors (PPP), W, U, DualFeasible ((6)–(7)), CompSlack ((8)–(10)) and BlossomSequence, all in the namespace EdmondsMatching65.Polyhedron.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem (P)

ext⁡(C)=P.\operatorname{ext}(C)=P.ext(C)=P.

The vertices (extreme points) of CCC are exactly the matching vectors of GGG. Hence the maximum weight of a matching equals max⁡{W(c,x):x∈C}\max\{W(c,x):x\in C\}max{W(c,x):x∈C} for every ccc.

Milestones

  1. P⊆ext⁡(C)P\subseteq\operatorname{ext}(C)P⊆ext(C) (§2, p. 126).
  2. If for every ccc some 0–1 point of CCC maximizes W(c,⋅)W(c,\cdot)W(c,⋅) over CCC, then ext⁡(C)=P\operatorname{ext}(C)=Pext(C)=P (§2, p. 126).
  3. Weak duality: W(c,x)≤U(y,z)W(c,x)\le U(y,z)W(c,x)≤U(y,z) for x∈Cx\in Cx∈C and ⟨y,z⟩\langle y,z\rangle⟨y,z⟩ satisfying (6)–(7) (§3, p. 126).
  4. If MMM is a matching and ⟨y,z⟩\langle y,z\rangle⟨y,z⟩ satisfies (6)–(10), then W(c,χM)=U(y,z)W(c,\chi^M)=U(y,z)W(c,χM)=U(y,z) (§3, p. 127).
  5. A blossom sequence for MMM yields ⟨y,z⟩\langle y,z\rangle⟨y,z⟩ satisfying (6)–(10) (§5, pp. 127–128).
  6. For every ccc some maximum matching has a blossom sequence (§6, p. 128).
  7. Theorem (M): a matching is maximum if and only if a blossom sequence for it exists (§4, p. 127).
  8. For every ccc there are a matching MMM and ⟨y,z⟩\langle y,z\rangle⟨y,z⟩ satisfying (6)–(10) (§3, p. 127).

Significance

The result. Theorem (P) turns maximum-weight matching in general graphs into a linear program over an explicitly described polyhedron, and Theorem (M) with the §5 translation gives a short certificate of optimality for every maximum matching. Together they established the template of polyhedral combinatorics: describe the convex hull of the combinatorial objects by inequalities, and prove the description through linear programming duality and an algorithm. The matching polytope underlies the analysis of the weighted blossom algorithm, separation over odd-set inequalities (Padberg–Rao), and many later integrality results; Edmonds' own §8 states the extension to degree-constrained subgraphs.

Formalizing it. The theorem has been proved since 1965 and appears in every text on combinatorial optimization; this mission asks for a machine-checked proof of the polytope statement for general finite graphs, including parallel edges, together with the duality certificate and the blossom-sequence characterization. The prove2me platform has a proved form of Edmonds' perfect matching polytope theorem on complete graphs in convex-decomposition form (MetricTSP.pm_polytope_decomposition), a different polytope with a different conclusion; nothing states Theorem (P) or Theorem (M).

Difficulty

The inclusion P⊆ext⁡(C)P\subseteq\operatorname{ext}(C)P⊆ext(C) and weak duality are routine. The difficulty is the reverse inclusion: showing that no fractional point of CCC is a vertex. The bipartite argument (a fractional point has a cycle of fractional edges along which it can be perturbed both ways) breaks on odd cycles: perturbing along an odd circuit violates a degree inequality, and the odd-set inequalities that cut off the half-integral points are exponentially many and overlap. The paper's route needs, for every weight vector, an optimal matching together with a dual solution satisfying (6)–(10), and the existence of that certificate is the substance of the weighted matching algorithm: the blossom sequence of Theorem (M) must be constructed, and the translation (11)–(16) from node and edge weights of the contracted graphs to ⟨y,z⟩\langle y,z\rangle⟨y,z⟩ must be verified through the whole shrinking history.

Formalization scope

  • The graph is a finite node type V, a finite edge type E and an end map ends : E → Sym2 V with no loops. Parallel edges are allowed: the contracted graphs of Theorem (M) have them, and Theorem (P) holds for multigraphs; simple graphs are the case of an injective end map.
  • Vectors are E → ℝ, one coordinate per edge. Vertices are Mathlib's Set.extremePoints ℝ. Odd sets carry an explicit r : ℕ with 1 ≤ r and |S| = 2r + 1; even sets and singletons carry no inequality.
  • Edge weights are arbitrary reals; matchings need not be perfect and may be empty. No connectivity, no parity of |V|.
  • The dual variable z is a function on all node sets of which only odd sets are read.
  • A contracted graph Gᵢ is a partition of V into blocks; an edge of G is an edge of Gᵢ when its ends lie in different blocks. Each Mᵢ must be a matching of Gᵢ, and all of (a)–(k) appear as fields of BlossomSequence; a sequence missing any of them would make milestone 6 trivial or milestone 5 false.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: coordinates indexed by node pairs (Sym2 V → ℝ) leave non-edge coordinates free and give a polyhedron with no extreme points, and the goal is stated as equality of extreme points, not as a convex-hull identity or as the existence of a dual certificate.
  • Needed infrastructure: extreme points of polyhedra as unique maximizers of linear forms, finite LP weak duality over these index sets, and the weighted blossom algorithm (or another proof of milestone 8). The polyhedral lemmas are reusable for other integrality results; contributions on any milestone are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Edmonds, Maximum Matching and a Polyhedron With 0,1-Vertices, J. Res. Nat. Bur. Standards Sect. B 69B (1965), 125–130. https://doi.org/10.6028/jres.069b.013
  • J. Edmonds, Paths, Trees, and Flowers, Canad. J. Math. 17 (1965), 449–467. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1965-045-4
  • W. T. Tutte, The Factorization of Linear Graphs, J. London Math. Soc. 22 (1947), 107–111. https://doi.org/10.1112/jlms/s1-22.2.107
  • M. W. Padberg, M. R. Rao, Odd Minimum Cut-Sets and b-Matchings, Math. Oper. Res. 7 (1982), 67–80. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.7.1.67
  • A. Schrijver, Combinatorial Optimization: Polyhedra and Efficiency, Springer, 2003, Chapter 25.
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

A Characterization of Waiting Time Performance Realizable by Single-Server Queues: The Conservation-Law Polytope Is the Convex Hull of the Preemptive Priority VectorsResearch Paper

Motivation

A single server shared by several classes of jobs must decide, at every moment, which class to serve. Different scheduling rules give different mean response times to the classes, and a system designer often starts from the other end: a target vector of mean response times, one per class, and the question whether any rule can meet it. Coffman and Mitrani answered this question for the multiclass M/M/1 queue in A Characterization of Waiting Time Performance Realizable by Single-Server Queues (Operations Research 28 (1980), 810–821). Their answer is a polytope with an explicit description: the response-time vectors that can be realized are exactly the convex combinations of the vectors of the preemptive priority rules, and these are exactly the vectors satisfying one equation and 2M−22^M-22M−2 inequalities.

The starting point is Kleinrock's conservation law (Kleinrock, Naval Res. Logist. Quart. 12 (1965)): a weighted sum of the response times does not depend on the rule. The characterization is the first instance of what was later called the achievable region method, developed for general multiclass systems by Federgruen and Groenevelt (Oper. Res. 36 (1988)), Shanthikumar and Yao (Oper. Res. 40 (1992)) and Bertsimas and Niño-Mora (Math. Oper. Res. 21 (1996)), and used to derive priority-index policies such as the cμc\mucμ rule and Gittins indices.

Setting

There are M≥1M\ge1M≥1 job classes. Jobs of class iii arrive in a Poisson stream at rate λi>0\lambda_i>0λi​>0 and have exponential service times with parameter μi>0\mu_i>0μi​>0. The traffic intensity of class iii is ρi=λi/μi\rho_i=\lambda_i/\mu_iρi​=λi​/μi​, and the system is stable: ρ=ρ1+⋯+ρM<1\rho=\rho_1+\cdots+\rho_M<1ρ=ρ1​+⋯+ρM​<1. A performance vector W=(W1,…,WM)W=(W_1,\dots,W_M)W=(W1​,…,WM​) lists the mean response times of the classes. Write ai=ρi/μia_i=\rho_i/\mu_iai​=ρi​/μi​, V=∑iλi/μi2V=\sum_i\lambda_i/\mu_i^2V=∑i​λi​/μi2​, and for a set ggg of classes

f(g)=∑i∈gai1−∑i∈gρi,f(∅)=0.f(g)=\frac{\sum_{i\in g}a_i}{1-\sum_{i\in g}\rho_i},\qquad f(\emptyset)=0 .f(g)=1−∑i∈g​ρi​∑i∈g​ai​​,f(∅)=0.
  • The conservation law (1): ∑i=1MρiWi=V/(1−ρ)\sum_{i=1}^M\rho_iW_i=V/(1-\rho)∑i=1M​ρi​Wi​=V/(1−ρ), which equals f({1,…,M})f(\{1,\dots,M\})f({1,…,M}).
  • The inequalities (4): ∑i∈gρiWi≥f(g)\sum_{i\in g}\rho_iW_i\ge f(g)∑i∈g​ρi​Wi​≥f(g) for each proper nonempty set ggg of classes.
  • H∗∗H^{**}H∗∗ is the set of WWW satisfying (1) and (4).
  • A priority order lists the classes as i1,…,iMi_1,\dots,i_Mi1​,…,iM​, i1i_1i1​ highest. The preemptive priority vector P(i1,…,iM)P(i_1,\dots,i_M)P(i1​,…,iM​) is the vector with ∑i∈SkρiWi=f(Sk)\sum_{i\in S_k}\rho_iW_i=f(S_k)∑i∈Sk​​ρi​Wi​=f(Sk​) for the top sets Sk={i1,…,ik}S_k=\{i_1,\dots,i_k\}Sk​={i1​,…,ik​}, k=1,…,Mk=1,\dots,Mk=1,…,M; explicitly Pik=(f(Sk)−f(Sk−1))/ρikP_{i_k}=(f(S_k)-f(S_{k-1}))/\rho_{i_k}Pik​​=(f(Sk​)−f(Sk−1​))/ρik​​. For M=2M=2M=2, P(1,2)1=1/(μ1−λ1)P(1,2)_1=1/(\mu_1-\lambda_1)P(1,2)1​=1/(μ1​−λ1​), the M/M/1 response time of class 1 alone.
  • HHH, (3), is the set of convex combinations ∑k=1MαkPk\sum_{k=1}^M\alpha_kP_k∑k=1M​αk​Pk​ of MMM preemptive priority vectors.

In Lean the data are a structure Params M carrying λ,μ\lambda,\muλ,μ and the three standing assumptions; Params.f, Params.Hss (H∗∗H^{**}H∗∗), Params.prioVec, topSet and Params.H are the objects above.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2, analytical form

H∗∗=H.H^{**}=H .H∗∗=H.

The paper's Theorem 2 says a vector is achievable by a scheduling strategy iff it lies in HHH; its proof is the chain H⊆H∗⊆H∗∗⊆HH\subseteq H^*\subseteq H^{**}\subseteq HH⊆H∗⊆H∗∗⊆H, where H∗H^*H∗ is the achievable set. The goal is the part of the chain that involves no strategies.

Milestones

  1. The priority vector is the unique solution of the equations (5) for its chain of top sets.
  2. The first inequality of the proof of Lemma 2: (1−ρ(g1))(1−ρ(g2))>(1−ρ(g1∪g2))(1−ρ(g1∩g2))(1-\rho(g_1))(1-\rho(g_2))>(1-\rho(g_1\cup g_2))(1-\rho(g_1\cap g_2))(1−ρ(g1​))(1−ρ(g2​))>(1−ρ(g1​∪g2​))(1−ρ(g1​∩g2​)) for crossing g1,g2g_1,g_2g1​,g2​.
  3. The second inequality of that proof, in the coefficients aia_iai​.
  4. Lemma 1 at the priority vectors: every P(i1,…,iM)P(i_1,\dots,i_M)P(i1​,…,iM​) lies in H∗∗H^{**}H∗∗.
  5. Two sets on which a point of H∗∗H^{**}H∗∗ satisfies (4) with equality are nested.
  6. Lemma 2: every vertex of H∗∗H^{**}H∗∗ is a preemptive priority vector.

A further item states the paper's final remark (§4): every linear cost ∑iciWi\sum_ic_iW_i∑i​ci​Wi​ is minimized over H∗∗H^{**}H∗∗ at some preemptive priority vector.

Significance

The theorem turns a question about all scheduling rules into a finite check: a target vector is realizable iff it satisfies (1) and the inequalities (4), and every realizable vector is realized by randomly mixing at most MMM priority rules. Linear costs over the realizable vectors are minimized by a priority rule, the fact behind the optimality of priority-index rules in multiclass queues. The paper also gives a linear program for finding the mixture.

The result has been proved since 1980. No machine-checked proof of it is known. The Prove2Me library holds the abstract generalized conservation law theorem of Gittins, Glazebrook and Weber (AllocationIndices.achievable_region_theorem, included as a reference item), which assumes the inequalities (4) for every policy and whose polytope also imposes nonnegativity; it does not compute the right-hand sides for the M/M/1 queue, does not prove that the priority vectors satisfy (4), and uses equality on the lowest-priority sets rather than the highest. This mission supplies the concrete polytope, the closed form of the priority vectors and the strict supermodularity of fff.

Difficulty

That the priority vectors lie in H∗∗H^{**}H∗∗ is a family of inequalities between ratios f(Sk)f(S_k)f(Sk​), one for each pair of a priority order and a set ggg, and the order and ggg need not interact in any simple way. The reverse inclusion is a statement about vertices: a vertex is determined by MMM tight constraints, and one has to show that they form a chain. This needs strict inequalities with the right direction for every crossing pair of sets, which is where the positivity of every λi,μi\lambda_i,\mu_iλi​,μi​ is used. If some λi=0\lambda_i=0λi​=0, then WiW_iWi​ appears in no constraint, H∗∗H^{**}H∗∗ is unbounded and the goal is false. Finally, HHH uses only MMM points, not all M!M!M!, so the goal contains a Carathéodory-type bound for the hyperplane of (1).

Formalization scope

Classes are Fin M, numbered from 000. A priority order is π : Equiv.Perm (Fin M) with π r the class of rank r, rank 000 highest. "Vertex" is an element of Set.extremePoints ℝ. The points of (3) are prioVec (σ k) for an arbitrary σ : Fin M → Equiv.Perm (Fin M), so repetitions are allowed. The priority vectors are given by their closed form, not as solutions of a system. The goal assumes M≥1M\ge1M≥1; for M=0M=0M=0 the set HHH is empty.

The paper's notion "achievable by some scheduling strategy" is replaced by its analytical characterization H∗∗H^{**}H∗∗: the strategy class of the paper (Assumptions 1–3, p. 812) is described only in prose and the steady-state means are assumed to exist, so the queueing half of the proof (Theorem 1, Lemma 1 for arbitrary strategies, the conservation law itself) is not stated. The goal is not to be stated on an abstract set satisfying hypotheses that encode Lemma 1 and (1); that form is already proved and drops the content of milestone 4. The conservation law is an equality, never the inequality (4) at the full set.

A complete development needs finite-set sums, the extreme points of a polyhedron and a Carathéodory argument in an affine hyperplane; the inequalities of milestones 2 and 3 and the vertex-chain argument are reusable for any strictly supermodular set function. Proofs of any milestone, and alternative proofs of the goal through polymatroid theory, are welcome.

Selected references

  • E. G. Coffman, Jr. and I. Mitrani, A Characterization of Waiting Time Performance Realizable by Single-Server Queues, Operations Research 28(3, Part II), 810–821, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.28.3.810
  • L. Kleinrock, A Conservation Law for a Wide Class of Queueing Disciplines, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 12, 181–192, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800120206
  • A. Federgruen and H. Groenevelt, Characterization and Optimization of Achievable Performance in General Queueing Systems, Operations Research 36(5), 733–741, 1988. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.36.5.733
  • J. G. Shanthikumar and D. D. Yao, Multiclass Queueing Systems: Polymatroidal Structure and Optimal Scheduling Control, Operations Research 40(3-supplement-2), S293–S299, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.40.3.S293
  • D. Bertsimas and J. Niño-Mora, Conservation Laws, Extended Polymatroids and Multiarmed Bandit Problems; A Polyhedral Approach to Indexable Systems, Mathematics of Operations Research 21(2), 257–306, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.21.2.257
  • J. Gittins, K. Glazebrook and R. Weber, Multi-armed Bandit Allocation Indices, 2nd ed., Wiley, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1002/9780470980033
9 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Gradient Convergence in Gradient Methods with Errors II: With Zero-Mean Stochastic Errors, Almost Surely Either f(x_t) → −∞ or f(x_t) Converges and ∇f(x_t) → 0Research Paper

Motivation

Stochastic gradient methods minimize a function fff when only noisy estimates of its gradient are available: each step moves along a descent direction corrupted by random noise. They are the standard training algorithm for neural networks and the basic tool of stochastic approximation, and the question every user faces is what can be guaranteed when fff is nonconvex, possibly unbounded below, and the noise is allowed to grow with the gradient.

D. P. Bertsekas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Gradient Convergence in Gradient Methods with Errors, SIAM J. Optim. 10(3):627–642, 2000 (DOI), answer this under minimal assumptions. Noise with variance growing in ∥∇f(xt)∥\|\nabla f(x_t)\|∥∇f(xt​)∥ had been handled for related methods (Poljak and Tsypkin 1973), but typically together with a lower bound on fff, under which f(xt)f(x_t)f(xt​) is approximately a supermartingale and the supermartingale convergence theorem applies (see the monographs of Kushner and Clark 1978; Benveniste, Métivier and Priouret 1990; Kushner and Yin 1996). Section 4 of the paper (p. 635) removes the lower bound: it proves that, with probability 1, either f(xt)→−∞f(x_t)\to-\inftyf(xt​)→−∞ or f(xt)f(x_t)f(xt​) converges and ∇f(xt)→0\nabla f(x_t)\to 0∇f(xt​)→0, without assuming bounded iterates. Section 5 shows that the randomized incremental gradient method for a finite-sum objective is a special case. This mission formalizes Section 4 and the Section 5 application. A companion mission covers the deterministic counterpart (Proposition 1 of the same paper).

Setting

Let f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R be continuously differentiable with a Lipschitz gradient: there is L≥0L\ge 0L≥0 with

∥∇f(x)−∇f(xˉ)∥≤L∥x−xˉ∥∀x,xˉ.(2.1)\|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(\bar x)\|\le L\|x-\bar x\|\qquad\forall x,\bar x. \tag{2.1}∥∇f(x)−∇f(xˉ)∥≤L∥x−xˉ∥∀x,xˉ.(2.1)

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space and F0⊆F1⊆⋯\mathcal F_0\subseteq\mathcal F_1\subseteq\cdotsF0​⊆F1​⊆⋯ an increasing sequence of σ\sigmaσ-fields (a filtration; Ft\mathcal F_tFt​ is the history of the algorithm just before the noise wtw_twt​ is drawn). The stochastic gradient method generates random vectors by

xt+1=xt+γt(st+wt),x_{t+1}=x_t+\gamma_t(s_t+w_t),xt+1​=xt​+γt​(st​+wt​),

where γt>0\gamma_t>0γt​>0 is a deterministic stepsize, sts_tst​ is a descent direction and wtw_twt​ is a noise term. The assumptions of Proposition 3 are:

  • (a) xtx_txt​ and sts_tst​ are Ft\mathcal F_tFt​-measurable;
  • (b) there are c1,c2>0c_1,c_2>0c1​,c2​>0 with c1∥∇f(xt)∥2≤−∇f(xt)′stc_1\|\nabla f(x_t)\|^2\le-\nabla f(x_t)'s_tc1​∥∇f(xt​)∥2≤−∇f(xt​)′st​ and ∥st∥≤c2(1+∥∇f(xt)∥)\|s_t\|\le c_2(1+\|\nabla f(x_t)\|)∥st​∥≤c2​(1+∥∇f(xt​)∥) for all ttt; (4.1)
  • (c) for all ttt, with probability 1, E[wt∣Ft]=0E[w_t\mid\mathcal F_t]=0E[wt​∣Ft​]=0 (4.2) and E[∥wt∥2∣Ft]≤A(1+∥∇f(xt)∥2)E[\|w_t\|^2\mid\mathcal F_t]\le A(1+\|\nabla f(x_t)\|^2)E[∥wt​∥2∣Ft​]≤A(1+∥∇f(xt​)∥2) (4.3), with A>0A>0A>0 deterministic;
  • (d) ∑tγt=∞\sum_t\gamma_t=\infty∑t​γt​=∞ and ∑tγt2<∞\sum_t\gamma_t^2<\infty∑t​γt2​<∞.

The noise variance in (c) may grow quadratically with ∥∇f(xt)∥\|\nabla f(x_t)\|∥∇f(xt​)∥ and is therefore unbounded in general. A point xˉ\bar xxˉ is stationary if ∇f(xˉ)=0\nabla f(\bar x)=0∇f(xˉ)=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 3 (p. 635)

Under (2.1) and (a)–(d), with probability 1,

f(xt)→−∞or(f(xt)→ℓ∈R  and  ∇f(xt)→0),f(x_t)\to-\infty\quad\text{or}\quad\Bigl(f(x_t)\to\ell\in\mathbb R\ \text{ and }\ \nabla f(x_t)\to 0\Bigr),f(xt​)→−∞or(f(xt​)→ℓ∈R  and  ∇f(xt​)→0),

and every limit point of (xt)(x_t)(xt​) is a stationary point of fff. The dichotomy is per sample path: different paths may take different branches.

Milestones

  1. (4.4), p. 636. The pathwise one-step inequality: if γ 2Lc22≤c1/2\gamma\,2Lc_2^2\le c_1/2γ2Lc22​≤c1​/2 and sss satisfies (4.1) at xxx, then for every www,
f(x+γ(s+w))≤f(x)−γc12∥∇f(x)∥2+γ∇f(x)′w+γ22Lc22+γ2L∥w∥2.f(x+\gamma(s+w))\le f(x)-\gamma\tfrac{c_1}{2}\|\nabla f(x)\|^2+\gamma\nabla f(x)'w+\gamma^2 2Lc_2^2+\gamma^2L\|w\|^2.f(x+γ(s+w))≤f(x)−γ2c1​​∥∇f(x)∥2+γ∇f(x)′w+γ22Lc22​+γ2L∥w∥2.
  1. Lemma 2, p. 637. If rtr_trt​ is Ft+1\mathcal F_{t+1}Ft+1​-measurable with E[rt∣Ft]=0E[r_t\mid\mathcal F_t]=0E[rt​∣Ft​]=0, E[∥rt∥2∣Ft]≤BE[\|r_t\|^2\mid\mathcal F_t]\le BE[∥rt​∥2∣Ft​]≤B and ∑γt2<∞\sum\gamma_t^2<\infty∑γt2​<∞, then ∑t≤Tγtrt\sum_{t\le T}\gamma_tr_t∑t≤T​γt​rt​ and ∑t≤Tγt2∥rt∥2\sum_{t\le T}\gamma_t^2\|r_t\|^2∑t≤T​γt2​∥rt​∥2 converge almost surely.
  2. Lemma 6, p. 640. For every δ>0\delta>0δ>0, almost surely f(xt)f(x_t)f(xt​) converges to a finite value or to −∞-\infty−∞, and if the limit is not −∞-\infty−∞ then lim sup⁡t∥∇f(xt)∥≤δ\limsup_t\|\nabla f(x_t)\|\le\deltalimsupt​∥∇f(xt​)∥≤δ.

Further result: §5, pp. 641–642

For f=1m∑ifif=\frac1m\sum_i f_if=m1​∑i​fi​ with Lipschitz gradients ∇fi\nabla f_i∇fi​ satisfying ∥∇fi(x)∥≤C+D∥∇f(x)∥\|\nabla f_i(x)\|\le C+D\|\nabla f(x)\|∥∇fi​(x)∥≤C+D∥∇f(x)∥ (5.2), the randomized incremental gradient method xt+1=xt−γt∇fk(t)(xt)x_{t+1}=x_t-\gamma_t\nabla f_{k(t)}(x_t)xt+1​=xt​−γt​∇fk(t)​(xt​), with independent uniform indices k(t)k(t)k(t), satisfies the conclusion of Proposition 3.

Significance

Proposition 3 is a convergence guarantee for stochastic gradient descent on smooth nonconvex objectives that needs neither a lower bound on fff, nor bounded iterates, nor bounded noise variance. It contains, as special cases, stochastic gradient descent with unbiased gradient estimates whose variance grows with the gradient, the randomized incremental (single-sample) gradient method for finite sums of Section 5, and scaled or approximate gradient directions through condition (4.1). Its conclusion is the strongest one available at this generality: if f(xt)f(x_t)f(xt​) stays bounded below along a path, then the gradient vanishes along that path and every limit point is stationary.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has not been machine-checked. Its formalization requires a working theory of generalized conditional expectations of non-integrable noise, square-integrable martingales in Rn\mathbb R^nRn and pathwise arguments over random interval partitions, which is reusable for other stochastic approximation results (Robbins–Monro type schemes, TD-learning, stochastic subgradient methods).

Difficulty

The natural first idea is to view f(xt)f(x_t)f(xt​) as a supermartingale up to summable errors and apply the supermartingale convergence theorem (Robbins–Siegmund). This fails here: the theorem needs f(xt)f(x_t)f(xt​) bounded below, and fff is not assumed bounded below; in addition the noise term γt2L∥wt∥2\gamma_t^2L\|w_t\|^2γt2​L∥wt​∥2 in (4.4) has conditional mean of order γt2∥∇f(xt)∥2\gamma_t^2\|\nabla f(x_t)\|^2γt2​∥∇f(xt​)∥2, which is not summable when the gradient is unbounded. Any argument must therefore extract a decrease of fff that dominates noise of the same order as the gradient itself, without a lower bound to anchor a supermartingale, and must do so along every sample path while the hypotheses are only conditional-expectation statements about non-integrable noise.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient f, fff is ContDiff ℝ 1, and the Lipschitz constant is L : ℝ≥0 with LipschitzWith L (gradient f) (the standing assumption (2.1), equivalent to the page's form).
  • The probability space is a Measure Ω with IsProbabilityMeasure, the σ\sigmaσ-fields are a Mathlib Filtration ℕ, and measurability in (a) is StronglyMeasurable[ℱ t]. The recursion and (4.1) hold on every sample path. Stepsizes are deterministic.
  • Conditional expectations of the noise. The page assumes no integrability of wtw_twt​, of ∥wt∥2\|w_t\|^2∥wt​∥2 or of f(xt)f(x_t)f(xt​), and none is added. Mathlib's condExp is 000 for non-integrable functions, so stating (4.2)–(4.3) with it would make them hold vacuously for any non-integrable noise; that encoding is ruled out. Instead (4.3) says that for every Ft\mathcal F_tFt​-measurable set SSS, ∫S∥wt∥2 dP≤∫SA(1+∥∇f(xt)∥2) dP\int_S\|w_t\|^2\,dP\le\int_S A(1+\|\nabla f(x_t)\|^2)\,dP∫S​∥wt​∥2dP≤∫S​A(1+∥∇f(xt​)∥2)dP (in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]), and (4.2) says that ∫Swt dP=0\int_S w_t\,dP=0∫S​wt​dP=0 for every Ft\mathcal F_tFt​-measurable SSS on which wtw_twt​ is integrable. These are exactly the generalized conditional-expectation statements of the page.
  • In Lemma 2 the bound BBB is a constant, so Mathlib's condExp is used there, with integrability of ∥rt∥2\|r_t\|^2∥rt​∥2 stated explicitly; the page's hypothesis implies it. Lemma 2 is stated over any finite-dimensional real inner-product space, since the paper applies it to real and to vector-valued sequences.
  • ∑γt=∞\sum\gamma_t=\infty∑γt​=∞ is divergence of the partial sums; ∑γt2<∞\sum\gamma_t^2<\infty∑γt2​<∞ is Summable. Convergent random series (Lemma 2) are convergence of partial sums, not Summable, which would mean unconditional convergence. "lim sup⁡∥∇f(xt)∥≤δ\limsup\|\nabla f(x_t)\|\le\deltalimsup∥∇f(xt​)∥≤δ" is "for every δ′>δ\delta'>\deltaδ′>δ, eventually ∥∇f(xt)∥≤δ′\|\nabla f(x_t)\|\le\delta'∥∇f(xt​)∥≤δ′". Limit points are MapClusterPt.
  • In the §5 result the page's references to "section 4" and "(4.1)" are read as section 3 and condition (3.1), the indices k(t)k(t)k(t) run from t=0t=0t=0, x0x_0x0​ is deterministic, and the stepsizes are nonnegative as on the page.
  • Not stated: Lemma 3 (it needs the random interval construction of p. 636 as a definition), Lemmas 4–5 (steps that depend on the proof's own choice of ϵ\epsilonϵ), and the Remarks of §4.

Contributions welcome: a proof of Lemma 2 from Mathlib's martingale convergence theorems (Submartingale.exists_ae_tendsto_of_bdd), a proof of (4.4) from the descent lemma, a general bridge between the set-integral encoding of conditional expectations and Mathlib's condExp on localizing sets, and the interval construction behind Lemmas 3–6.

Selected references

  • D. P. Bertsekas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Gradient Convergence in Gradient Methods with Errors, SIAM J. Optim. 10(3):627–642, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623497331063
  • B. T. Poljak and Y. Z. Tsypkin, Pseudogradient adaptation and training algorithms, Automat. Remote Control 12 (1973), 83–94.
  • H. J. Kushner and D. S. Clark, Stochastic Approximation Methods for Constrained and Unconstrained Systems, Springer, 1978.
  • H. J. Kushner and G. Yin, Stochastic Approximation Methods, Springer, 1996 (as cited in the paper).
  • A. Benveniste, M. Métivier and P. Priouret, Adaptive Algorithms and Stochastic Approximations, Springer, 1990.
  • D. P. Bertsekas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Neuro-Dynamic Programming, Athena Scientific, 1996.
4 thms4 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 3 of 67Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me